Manual Operare Bizerba En

Retail scale BC IIBasic Class IIOperating instructionsfrom program version 2..20

6.111.98.5.01.13 en

6.111.98.5.01.13Translation of original operating instructions

Alle Rechte vorbehaltenAll rights reservedTous droits réservésReservados todos los derechosTutti i diritti riservati

© 06 / 2011

Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG,72336 Balingen

Postfach 10 01 6472301 Balingen/Germany,Tel. (+49 7433) 12-0, Fax (+49 7433) 12-2696e-mail: [email protected]: http://www.bizerba.com

6.111.98.5.01.13

Chapter indexAbout these instructions �1About the device �2

Safety instructions �3

Installation �4

Device and operating controls �5

Operation �6

Programming �7

Troubleshooting �8

Maintenance �9

Technical data 10

Subject index 11

6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating instruction BC II List of contents

0 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

List of contents Page

1 About these instructions 1 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Safe-keeping 1 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 Target group 1 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 Symbols used 1 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4 Warnings 1 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Device 2 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Device types 2 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2 Accessories 2 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 Intended use 2 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 Designation label 2 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 Verification information 2 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6 Standards and guidelines 2 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7 Operating conditions 2 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 Power supply 2 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8 Warranty 2 - 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9 Disposal of devices/environmental protection 2 - 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Safety instructions 3 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Requirements on the operating personnel 3 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Device signs 3 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 Sources of risk related to the system 3 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Installation 4 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Transport and storage 4 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Installation and assembly 4 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Conditions for the place of installation 4 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Assemble the device 4 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Leveling 4 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Check the electric connection 4 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation of customer's power supply 4 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Cable connections 4 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Example of scale network 4 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating instruction BC IIList of contents

0 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

Page

4.2.6 Rechargeable battery 4 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation with rechargeable batteries 4 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery icon display 4 - 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Commissioning 4 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 Switch on device 4 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 Decommissioning 4 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Device and operating controls 5 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Main switch 5 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Display 5 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Display icons 5 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Keyboard 5 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Membrane keyboard 5 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Keyboard 5 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Key functions 5 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Keyboard options 5 - 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 Printer 5 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200 5 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Opening and closing the thermal print head 5 - 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Ticket printer 5 - 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 Label printer 5 - 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Operation 6 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Switching on device 6 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 Switch off device 6 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 Zerosetting device 6 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Operating options 6 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 Multiple-operator mode 6 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Self-service mode 6 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.3 Quick-service mode 6 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.4 Price labeling with manual triggering * 6 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.5 Price labeling with automatic start * 6 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.6 Piece price multi- label printing 6 - 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.7 Fixed weight label multi-printing 6 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 Unit price input via 10-key keypad 6 - 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) 6 - 9. .

6.6 Cancellation 6 - 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7 Scroll function 6 - 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.8 Constant 6 - 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

Page

6.9 Subtotal 6 - 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.10 Total 6 - 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.11 Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) 6 - 14. . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.1 Calling up PLUs 6 - 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.2 Operator sales with PLU 6 - 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. 6 - 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ”Overwrite” PLU unit price”. 6 - 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces 6 - 16Register manual weight input ( depending on country) 6 - 17. . . . . . . . .

6.12 Tare functions 6 - 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.1 Tare balancing for unknown tare values 6 - 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unknown tare 6 - 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batch tare (country-related) 6 - 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12.2 Tare balancing for known tare values 6 - 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual tare (country-related) 6 - 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU tare 6 - 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 6 - 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.12.3 Operator tare 6 - 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save tare value weighed 6 - 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save tare value entered 6 - 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call up operator tare saved 6 - 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.13 Assisted sales with ticket 6 - 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.14 Talon 6 - 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.15 Print ticket upon request 6 - 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.16 Repeat ticket 6 - 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.17 Open ticket again 6 - 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.1 Open the last ticket via the operator key. 6 - 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.2 Open the ticket via ticket number 6 - 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.3 Overwrite VAT from PLU 6 - 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.18 Serviced selling with label layout 6 - 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.19 By Count article 6 - 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.20 Fixed weight 6 - 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.21 By Count fixed weight 6 - 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.22 Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out 6 - 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.23 Product with data of origin 6 - 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23.1 Sale with manual input of the traceability number 6 - 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23.2 Sale with fixed traceability number. 6 - 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7 Programming 7 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Initial display 7 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Menu password 7 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu 7 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General programming sequence 7 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4 Initial scale setting 7 - 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5 Overview of list 7 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.1 PLU article 7 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.2 Header and footer texts 7 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.3 Additional texts 7 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.4 Scrolling message 7 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.5 PLU direct keys 7 - 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.6 Barcode structure 7 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.7 BLD labels 7 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.8 Logos 7 - 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5.9 VAT rates 7 - 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6 General procedure for text input 7 - 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7 Overview of scrolling messages 7 - 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.8 Barcode overview 7 - 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturer code WAN 13 7 - 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instore code EAN 13 7 - 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code 128 7 - 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.9 Traceability marker 7 - 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10 Overview of By Count article definition 7 - 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create By Count piece goods in a PLU 7 - 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.11 Create overview of fixed weight 7 - 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.12 Overview of By Count fixed weight 7 - 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.13 Overview VAT 7 - 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13.1 Assign VAT to PLU 7 - 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.14 Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) 7 - 36. . .


0 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7.15 PLU maintenance menu Pr 1-- 7 - 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15.1 Create PLU (article) Pr 110 7 - 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unit price input 7 - 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product group 7 - 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare 7 - 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use-by date 7 - 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for article 7 - 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price overwriting 7 - 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Article type 7 - 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight class 7 - 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data of origin 7 - 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU article text 7 - 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary text 1-4 7 - 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary text 1 - -10 for BLD text fields 7 - 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo print in BLD logo fields 7 - 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Count: Piece per package 7 - 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight 7 - 47. . . . . . By Count: Mandatory input of pieces 7 - 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Count: Fixed weight 7 - 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Count: Fixed weight mode 7 - 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandatory input of fixed weight 7 - 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT number 7 - 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT can be overwritten 7 - 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare % (dependent on country) 7 - 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.15.2 Print PLU (article) lists Pr 115 7 - 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15.3 Delete PLU (article) individually Pr 120 7 - 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15.4 Delete PLU (article) from - to Pr 121 7 - 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16 Data maintenance Menu Pr 2-- 7 - 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16.1 Define supplementary texts Pr 200 7 - 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16.2 Create header and footer notes text Pr 201 7 - 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16.3 Create text of scrolling message Pr 202 7 - 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16.4 Print texts Pr 205 7 - 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16.5 Delete supplementary texts amd header/foot texts Pr 206 7 - 56. . . .

Delete supplementary text individually 7 - 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete all supplementary texts 7 - 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete header and footer texts 7 - 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete scrolling message texts 7 - 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16.6 Define barcode structure Pr 210 7 - 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create barcode format 7 - 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter code constant 7 - 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select numeric code 7 - 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check and adopt code structure 7 - 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16.7 Administer barcode structure Pr 211 7 - 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7.16.8 Non-PLU settings Pr 215 7 - 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) 7 - 64. . . . . . . . . Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles 7 - 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 7 - 65. . . . . Barcode for non-PLU minus article 7 - 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for total 7 - 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product groups for non-PLU weighed articles 7 - 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 7 - 66Product groups for non-PLU minus articles 7 - 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles 7 - 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 7 - 67. . . . . . . . . VAT for Non-PLU minus articles 7 - 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16.9 BLD label list / print logo list Pr220 7 - 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print BLD label list 7 - 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print logo list 7 - 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16.10 Delete BLD labels / logos Pr 225 7 - 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete BLD labels 7 - 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete BLD logos 7 - 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16.11 Define VAT Pr 230 7 - 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define VAT rate 7 - 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incl. or excl. VAT 7 - 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT text 7 - 70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.16.12 Manage VAT Pr 231 7 - 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing VAT list 7 - 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting VAT number 7 - 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Same VAT for all articles 7 - 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.17 Reports menu Pr 3-- 7 - 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17.1 Configure report layout Pr 300 7 - 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17.2 Print reports on ticket Pr310 7 - 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scale report 7 - 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU report with one product text line 7 - 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU report with all article text lines 7 - 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product group report 7 - 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator report 7 - 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line 7 - 77. . . . Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines 7 - 78. . . . VAT sales report 7 - 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.17.3 Print report on label Pr311 7 - 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17.4 Display / delete sales Pr320 7 - 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Display sales 7 - 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete sales 7 - 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.18 Device Configuration Menu Pr 5-- 7 - 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18.1 Setting date and time Pr500 7 - 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting date 7 - 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting time 7 - 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits 7 - 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date representation 7 - 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 76.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7.18.2 Select type of paper Pr 505 7 - 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18.3 Setting main operating mode Pr 510 7 - 84.

Select main operating mode 7 - 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select layout 7 - 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addition of customer total 7 - 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.18.4 Setting switching operating mode Pr 511 7 - 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select switching operating mode 7 - 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select layout 7 - 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addition of customer total 7 - 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.18.5 Settings for different operating modes Pr 515 7 - 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic zerosetting 7 - 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open tickets / labels 7 - 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traceability marker 7 - 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define traceability number 7 - 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative customer total 7 - 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales calculation 7 - 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compulsory entry for By Count pieces 7 - 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compulsory entry for fixed weight 7 - 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.18.6 Scrolling message settings Pr 516 7 - 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select scrolling message no. 7 - 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select display location 7 - 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activate scrolling message 7 - 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test scrolling message 7 - 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.18.7 Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 520 7 - 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constant key function 7 - 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print article and total label 7 - 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator items display 7 - 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cash functions 7 - 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Payment in/out 7 - 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talon print-out 7 - 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeat ticket 7 - 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open ticket again 7 - 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print cancellation and canceled articles 7 - 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing included VAT 7 - 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print ticket if requested 7 - 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.18.8 Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 521 7 - 96. 7.18.9 Settings for price labeling mode * Pr 525 7 - 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Labeling mode 7 - 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piece price multiple label printing 7 - 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.18.10 Configure operator keys with operator no. Pr 530 7 - 99. . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18.11 PLU input mode and range limitation Pr 535 7 - 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input 7 - 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU entry: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. 7 - 100. . . . . PLU direct key mode 7 - 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU direct key allocation 7 - 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU range limitation 7 - 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delay time PLU no. input 7 - 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7.18.12 Print out PLU direct keys Pr 536 7 - 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18.13 Tare fixed value memory Pr 540 7 - 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18.14 Rounding and price calculation settings for

national currency Pr545 7 - 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding methods for customer total * 7 - 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding of article total * 7 - 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding for By Count 7 - 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.19 Ticket design overview 7 - 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19.1 Create ticket Pr 550 7 - 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print barcode on ticket 7 - 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode height in mm on ticket 7 - 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print tare on ticket 7 - 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print header text 7 - 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print footer text 7 - 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print foreign currency supplementary text 7 - 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print rounding supplementary text 7 - 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font change on ticket 7 - 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket 7 - 111. . . . . . . . . Ticket counter printout 7 - 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print foreign currency 7 - 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print amount paid in/out 7 - 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print supplementary texts 7 - 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print header logo 7 - 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print footer logo 7 - 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 96.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7.20 Label design overview 7 - 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLD labels 7 - 115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.20.1 Create labels Pr 555 7 - 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label type 7 - 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select BLD labels 7 - 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label size 7 - 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change label distance 7 - 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaged-on and sell-by date on label 7 - 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode on label 7 - 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode height in mm 7 - 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare printout on label 7 - 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print header text 7 - 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternative text for sell-by date 7 - 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo printout 7 - 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start of text field 7 - 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start of data field 7 - 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data field monitoring 7 - 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font change on label 7 - 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print price frame and texts on label 7 - 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label 7 - 123. . . . . . . . Print foreign currency 7 - 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) 7 - 124. . . . . . Alternative text for packaged-on date 7 - 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternative text for use-by date 7 - 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print units on the label 7 - 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print speed for label layout 7 - 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.20.2 Labels configuration management Pr 556 7 - 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save configuration from Pr 555 7 - 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select label configuration 7 - 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete label configuration 7 - 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.20.3 Foreign currency settings Pr 560 7 - 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select foreign currency function 7 - 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select foreign/ second currency display 7 - 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency calculation method 7 - 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout 7 - 130. . . . . . . . . Foreign currency characters on label for price field 7 - 130. . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal places in foreign currency 7 - 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency factor 7 - 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) 7 - 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding of foreign currency 7 - 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7.21 Database configuration menu Pr 6-- 7 - 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.1 TCP-IP settings Pr600 7 - 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DHCP 7 - 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of current scale IP address 7 - 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP: IP address if no DHCP selected 7 - 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected 7 - 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected 7 - 133. . . . . . . . . . . DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected 7 - 134DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected 7 - 134. Host name: 7 - 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leasing address 7 - 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.21.2 Display current IP address Pr601 7 - 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.3 Print out of communication settings Pr602 7 - 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.4 Setting scale number Pr 603 7 - 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.5 Setting department number Pr604 7 - 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.6 Setting machine ID Pr605 7 - 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.7 Database configuration (memory management) Pr 606 7 - 136. . . . . . .

No. of PLUs 7 - 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of supplementary texts per PLU 7 - 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of BLD text fields per PLU 7 - 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 7 - 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of supplementary texts 7 - 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of items (ticket memory) 7 - 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By Count, fixed weight, VAT and tare % 7 - 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal places* 7 - 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Database configuration 7 - 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.21.8 Setting scale for system (continuous operation) Pr 607 7 - 140. . . . . . . Scale type 7 - 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicast IP address 7 - 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicast port number 7 - 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UDP port number 7 - 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.21.9 Control display lighting Pr 610 7 - 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.10 Turn-of f time of scale Pr615 7 - 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.11 WLAN settings Pr 621 7 - 143.

Activate WLAN 7 - 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time slices 7 - 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ping on/off 7 - 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address of WLAN module 7 - 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test telegram on/off 7 - 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address of telegram recipient 7 - 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port number of telegram recipient 7 - 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.21.12 Beeper on/off Pr 622 7 - 146. 7.21.13 Sensitivity of scale (display) Pr625 7 - 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.14 Change key function Pr 630 7 - 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.15 Keyboard selection Pr631 7 - 149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.16 RAM clearing Pr 666 7 - 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21.17 Enter password for menu Pr 690 7 - 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 116.111.98.5.01.13

Page

7.21.18 Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting Pr 695 7 - 151. . . . . . . . Change main currency to second currency (Euro) 7 - 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert PLU price into EURO 7 - 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.22 Service menu Pr 7-- 7 - 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.1 Test print Pr 700 7 - 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.2 Print boot log information Pr 701 7 - 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.3 Print fonts Pr 702 7 - 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.4 Print menu settings Pr 703 7 - 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.5 Print weighing system information Pr 704 7 - 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.6 Printer settings Pr 710 7 - 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Feed for labels 7 - 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move print format on the label 7 - 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correct ticket feed 7 - 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket 7 - 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change printing intensity 7 - 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.22.7 Display ADC programming version Pr 712 7 - 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.8 Display load cell type Pr 715 7 - 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.9 Display program version Pr 716 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main program version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bootloader version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option resource version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout resource version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu resource version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text resource version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard resource version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font resource version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software version number 7 - 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.22.10 Display battery voltage Pr 717 7 - 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.11 Display test Pr 718 7 - 160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22.12 Logbook control Pr 730 7 - 160.

7.23 Programming overview 7 - 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


0 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.13

Page

8 Troubleshooting 8 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 Fault description 8 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.2 Messages 8 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Maintenance 9 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Cleaning 9 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1 Cleaning device 9 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2 Cleaning the printer 9 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3 Cleaning products for printer 9 - 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.2 Maintenance 9 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Testing the weight display 9 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.2 Note on storing thermal paper 9 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.3 Ticket, label and Linerless rollers 9 - 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Technical data 10 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Dimensions 10 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.2 Power supply 10 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.3 Environmental conditions 10 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threshold values 10 - 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Subject index 11 - 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix

Declaration of Conformity for BC ll

Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN

eurofins Certificate modas BWLC-V2

Operating instruction BC II About these instructions

1 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

1 About these instructionsRead through the operating manual carefully before connecting and switching on thedevice to ensure that you fully utilize the quality and possibilities of application this deviceoffers.

This operating manual explains how to operate and set the device.It also includes functions that are only required by Bizerba Service. Contact your Bizerbatechnical consultant if necessary.

Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specificregulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the instructions may differ from the suppliedversion.

1.1 Safe-keepingThis operating manual is an integral part of the device and must be kept next to it, easilyaccessible for all personnel.If the device is resold, the complete operating manual must be provided with it.

1.2 Target groupThe device may only be operated by trained personnel. This means that the operator mustbe familiar with the contents of this operating manual.Installation, servicing and repairs may only be performed by qualified personnel authorizedby Bizerba.

�1

Operating instruction BC IIAbout these instructions

1 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

1.3 Symbols usedVarious symbols are used in these instructions.

Symbol Meaning

Text with arrow prompts you to carry out an action.

Mod Key symbols prompt you to press this key on

+ Key symbols with a + prompt you to keep the 1st key held down while

you press the second key.

1 Position numbers in figures.

<Key> Text within < > describes a key.

”Display” Text within ” ” indicates the display text.

Notes_______________________________________________________________________

Observance of these notes is mandatory.

_______________________________________________________________________

Information_______________________________________________________________________

This information is provided for greater understanding.

_______________________________________________________________________

Menu settingsPrerequisites and menu settings for functions or rules are highlighted in gray.Menu settings are the prerequisites for descriptions or operation procedures.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permitted

Syntax: Pr 110/ 06 -1Pr 110 Program number “110”/ 06 Submenu “06”- 1 Setting “1”

�1

Operating instruction BC II About these instructions

1 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

1.4 WarningsWarnings are divided into danger levels by the signal word.

Signal wordSymbol Meaning

_______________________________________________________________________

DANGER Source of danger with high risk with imminent danger forpersonnel!

The consequences are:- critical injuries- severe damage to health

Measures to avoid the danger are specified.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

WARNING Source of danger with medium risk with potentially threateningdanger for personnel!

The consequences can be:- serious injuries- damage to health- serious damage to property


_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION Source of danger with low risk with potentially threateningdanger for personnel!

The consequences can be:- Injuries- Damage to property


_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION Source of danger, improper use!

Damage to property can result.


_______________________________________________________________________

�1

Operating instruction BC IIAbout these instructions

1 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

�1

Operating instruction BC II About the device

2 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

2 Device

2.1 Device typesThe BC II device type is available with either a thermal ticket printer or a label printer.

T = Thermal ticket printerE = Label printer

BC II 800 TBC II 800 E

Fig. 1: BC II 800


Fig. 2: BC II 100


Fig. 3: BC II 200

2.2 AccessoriesWe offer a comprehensive accessories program for the device. Please contact yourBizerba technical consultant for further information.

2.3 Intended useThe BC II scale is particularly suitable for counter sales, quick and self-service, as well asmanual price labeling and simple cash reg. (POS) functions. Use devices only for intendeduse.

�2

Operating instruction BC IIAbout the device

2 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

2.4 Designation label Designation label of a verified scale.

BC II 800

Fig. 4: Explanations of the individual labels:

Explanations of the individual labels:

11147xxxxx Designation label no.

CE 07 CE certification with the last two digits of the year in which theCE certification was applied.

0103 Identification number of the appointed body ”Verification Ma‐nagement - Stuttgart”

D07-09-014 No. of EC type approval

M green square symbol (sign for EC-first verification)

BIZERBA Manufacturer

Note on recommended battery change - the battery in theCPU unit should be replaced by Bizerba Customer Service inthe year printed on the label. A defective battery can result inthe loss of saved data.

BCII Type designation (basic type)

Nr./No. Device No.

Max 6 kg Maximum load Max

Min 20 g Minimum load Min

e = 2 g Verification value , e

T= - 6 kg Subtractive tare maximum load T= -

MADE BY BIZERBA Manufacturer

120-240V 0.2-0.1A50/60Hz

Electrical data

Scale accuracy class III

�2


2 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

2.5 Verification information

Verification information for EC countries

The green M (sign for EC-first verification) is on the designation label of the scale. Thistype of scale can be put into operation and used on site provided that it is not connected toan additional device, e.g. cash register or printer.

Scales that are connected on site to an additional device (e.g. cash register or printer)must have their first verification carried out either by the responsible verification office orby a verification officer from Bizerba. Scales as well as the additional device (e.g. cashregister) must be tested and verified. If the scale fulfills the verification specifications withtheir additional device, it can be used in legal for trade applications. In the case ofextensions at a later date, once the scale has already been put into operation, the relevantverification office must be informed.

Scales and additional devices without the CE mark may not be used in legal for tradeoperations.

Scales that are verified to a specific verification zone (acceleration of fall) (details aregiven on the designation label) may not be used in other verification zones without beingreverified.

According to statutory regulations, the user of a scale must ensure that it is used for itsintended purpose. This includes observation of the verification guidelines, in particularamendments, supplements and additions.

Reverification informationReverification of scales is executed according to the respective statutory countryregulations. The verification validity period in Germany for example, for scales is usually 2years.� Price labeling scales have a verification validity period of 1 year. The verificationvalidity period begins when the scales are put into circulation (installation andcommissioning). Please refer here to the designation label (in the present example, 2007,as the designation is CE 07).

Verification information for non-EU countriesThe statutory regulations of the specific countries must be observed.

_______________________________________________________________________

A yellow mark of conformity is affixed to the load receptor of thescale, with the inscription ”Verified by BIZERBA” (first verification byBizerba). Reverifications must be carried out by the operator of thescale according to the legal requirements.

_______________________________________________________________________

�2


2 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

2.6 Standards and guidelinesThe equipment fulfils the following requirements:

Measuring technology

Directive 90/384/EEC scales guidelines ”nonautomatic scales”

OIML R76-Ed. 2006 Organisation internationale de métrologie légale Nonautomatic weighing instruments

DIN EN 45501 Metrological aspects of nonautomatic scales

OIML R60 Metrological regulation for load cells

WELMEC 2.3 Guideline for software testing

Handbook 44 Specifications, tolerances and other technical require‐ments for weighing and measuring devices (USA)

Publication 14 Weighing devices, Checklist, Test procedures(USA)Weights and Measures Act (Canada)

Electromagnetic compatibility

Directive 2004/108/ EC EMC-guideline

DIN EN 61000-6-1/ 2007-10 interference resistanceResidential, commercial and light industry

DIN EN 61000-6-3/ 2007-09 emitted interferenceResidential, commercial and light industry

DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10 Harmonics current

DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06 Voltage fluctuations and flickers

GB 9254-1998 Information Technology Equipment - Radio DisturbanceCharacteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement

Electrical safety

Directive 2006/ 95 EC Low voltage guideline

IEC 60950-1/ 2001 Information technology equipment - Safety

DIN EN 60950-1/ 2006-11 Information technology equipment - Safety

UL 60950-1/ 2006-07 Information technology equipment - Safety

DIN EN 60529/ 2000-09 Protection types provided by housing (IP code)

�2


2 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

2.7 Operating conditionsDo not install or commission equipment until the operating conditions have been fulfilled.

- Temperature and air humidity:The permitted values and class of protection are found on the designation label on thedevice and on page 10 - 2.

- Installation areaA flat, vibration-free position as well as the driest possible installation must beguaranteed for our equipment.Vibrations can affect measurements made by the scales.

- Align horizontallyTo ensure the precision of the sales, it is of absolute necessity that the device isaligned horizontally.

- DraftDrafts can affect the measurements made by the scales.

- Air convectionFree air convection must be able to form around the device in order to avoidinadmissible heating.

- Supply voltageThe permitted values can be found on the designation label on the device - and see page 10 - 2.

- Trained personnel:Only trained personnel can maximize the performance of the device and avoid risks.

- Written consent for modifications:Modifications to the devices require our prior written consent. External data dialogbetween Bizerba equipment and other manufacturers' equipment, the hardware andsoftware required, test and modification work, must be clarified with us in writing.

Please contact us or our competent customer service points if you have any doubtsregarding the practical application of these conditions.

For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respectivemanufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.

�2


2 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

2.7.1 Power supply The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must becarried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derivedfrom them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the followingcommissions:

- International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

- European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)

- Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)

Our units are built to VDE protection class I and must be connected to a protectiveconductor.

Interference suppression measuresIf the mains power supply is subject to electric interference, interference suppressionmeasures must be taken on site, e.g.:

- provision of separate mains cable to our equipment.

- in problem cases, insertion of capacitively decoupled isolating transformers or othersuppressors into the mains supply lines to our equipment.

�2


2 - 76.111.98.5.01.13

2.8 WarrantyInstallation, commissioning and initial training must be carried out by trained staff from oursales offices and customer service points or by companies authorized by us.

We do not accept any liability for damages resulting from:

- Non-compliance with our operating conditions and operating manual.

- Defective electrical installation by the customer.

- Structural changes to our equipment.

- Removal of verification seals and fuse stamps.

- Incorrect programming and operation.

- Natural wear and tear..

The warranty will lapse if defects/damage occur as a result of interventions by persons wehave not authorized or the use of non-Bizerba genuine spare parts.

If you reset or program devices, check the new setting with a test run and test printout.This helps to avoid faulty results.

Only trained staff may operate the equipment.

Check that our products are handled correctly and repeat training if necessary.

Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specificregulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the operating manual may differ from thesupplied version.

2.9 Disposal of devices/environmental protection

_______________________________________________________________________

Only applies to Germany!

_______________________________________________________________________

This device includes batteries which are subject to the Batteries Act concerning return anddisposal of used batteries and accumulators.

This act holds you as the end user responsible to return the device to the manufacturer orits distributor for the purpose of recycling and proper disposal after the end of its intendeduse.

Bizerba and its distributors are ready to except the returns of your old devices which areno longer operated.

In these instances, please, contact your Bizerba specialist in charge.

If the device includes a chargeable battery pack, according to the Battery Act you areresponsible to return used battery packs to the distributor or to return locations which areprovided to the public.

Of course, Bizerba and its distributors will also accept your used battery packs.

�2


2 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.13

�2

Operating instruction BC II Safety instructions

3 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

3 Safety instructionsThe safety instructions must be observed throughout the installation, operation,cleaning and maintenance procedures.

3.1 Requirements on the operating personnel

The device may only be operated by people who have been instructed in the operatingprocedure. The operating personnel must read and understand the safety instructions inthis Operating Manual.

Please pay special attention to and memorize all safety and hazard information!Carry out regular training!

Operators (purchasers) as well as supervisory and operating staff must carry outprogramming and data protection on our systems and equipment exclusively inaccordance with our operating and programming instructions.

Only use equipment for its intended purpose.

3.2 Device signs

Remove the mains plug from the socket

Fig. 5: Remove the mains plug from the socket

�3

Operating instruction BC IISafety instructions

3 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

3.3 Sources of risk related to the system

_______________________________________________________________________

For safety reasons, shut equipment down immediately in the event ofrecurring faults, damage of any type, and suspicion of risk of injury.

Always inform the nearest customer service point.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

Check before mains connection

Before connecting the device, check

- the power supply data on the designation label

- the power supply data of the mains supply

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

WARNING Incorrect supply voltage !

Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.

- Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the powersupply data do not match the connection values of the scale.The power supply data must be identical.

- Inform Bizerba Customer Service.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION Voltage at switched-off scale!

Even when the scale is switched off, the scale electronics is live.

- Remove the AC power plug to disconnect from the mains.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

WARNING Opening the device!

Electric shock.

- The device may only be opened by trained and qualified Bizerbapersonnel.

_______________________________________________________________________

�3

Operating instruction BC II Installation

4 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

4 Installation

4.1 Transport and storageAlways transport and store the device in the original packaging

4.2 Installation and assemblyInstallation, first commissioning, adjustment, initial instruction, Maintenance and repairmay only be performed by our customer service and/or by companies or personsauthorized by us.

4.2.1 Conditions for the place of installationThe place of installation must fulfil the following conditions.

- Flat installation surface.

- Freedom from vibrations, oscillations and drafts, as well as the driest possibleinstallation must be guaranteed for our equipment.

- The equipment must be arranged with respect for operating and work sequence, andtaking account of maintenance aspects.

4.2.2 Assemble the device

UnpackingOpen packaging, remove accessories and lift the device carefully out of the packaging.

�4

Operating instruction BC IIInstallation

4 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

4.2.3 LevelingTo compensate for any small irregularities in the floor space, the scale can be leveled atthe foot screws using a spirit level._______________________________________________________________________

After each change of location, the scale must be re-leveled.

_______________________________________________________________________

1 Position the spirit level2 Foot screws

Fig. 6: BC II 800

Fig. 7: BC II 100

Turn the foot screws 2 until the airbubble 3 is located in the center of thespirit level . 1

Fig. 8: Leveling

�4

1

2

12

1

3


4 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

4.2.4 Check the electric connection_______________________________________________________________________

WARNING Incorrect supply voltage!

Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.

- Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the powersupply data do not match the connection values of the scale.The power supply data must be identical.

- Inform Bizerba Customer Service.

_______________________________________________________________________

Installation of customer's power supply

The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must becarried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derivedfrom them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the followingcommissions:

- International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

- European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)

- Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)

_______________________________________________________________________

Check before mains connection

Before connecting the device, check

- the power supply data on the designation label

- the power supply data of the mains supply

_______________________________________________________________________

�4


4 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

4.2.5 Cable connections_______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION Do not insert or remove the connection cable when the deviceis switched on.

Interfaces are either defect or misfunctioning.

Always switch off the device before inserting or removing theconnection cable.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

Secure the power cable against falling out when strain drops. 4

_______________________________________________________________________

1 EDP (scale network)2 Cash drawer3 Power cable4 Clip (strain relief)

Fig. 9: BC II 100 / 200

1 EDP (scale network)2 Cash drawer3 Power cable4 Clip (strain relief)

Fig. 10: BC II 800

�4

1

2

34

1

2

4

3


4 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

Example of scale network

Several scales are connected with a switch.

Switch

Scale1 Scale 2 Scale 3 Scale 4 Scale 5 Scale 61 1 1 1 1 1

1 Connection scale (EDP, scale network)

_______________________________________________________________________

During installation and cabling of systems the Bizerba guideline“Networks for scales” need to be adhered to.

Ask your Bizerba consultant or Bizerba Service.

_______________________________________________________________________

�4


4 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

4.2.6 Rechargeable batteryThe BC II devices are available with and without rechargeable batteries._______________________________________________________________________

WARNING Replace the rechargeable battery!

Risk of explosion if not replaced properly.

- The installation or removal of the battery may only be carried outby our customer services and/or a company or person assignedby us.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

Charge battery completely before battery operation.

Procedure:- Connect mains to scale.- Switch on scale.

_______________________________________________________________________

Depending on the use and ambient temperature, with a fully charged battery, the scalescan be operated for 20-25 hours without being connected to the mains.

After only 6-7 hours charging time the battery is completely recharged.

Operation with rechargeable batteries

Rechargeable batteries will run down even during prolonged idle periods if the scale is notconnected to the mains. Therefore, connect the scale to the mains at least every3�months.

If the scales are being powered by the mains, the batteries are recharged when switched on(conservation charging).

_______________________________________________________________________

If the scales are operated at an ambient temperature below 0�C, thebattery cannot be recharged.

_______________________________________________________________________

Overloading the batteries is prevented automatically by an integrated charging circuit. Thischarging circuit also prevents any damaging total discharge. The battery lifetime reduces ifit is permanently operated at an almost discharged state.

_______________________________________________________________________

When being operated by battery, the printer prints at a slower speed.

Due to this intentional reduced printing speed, the scales can beoperated for a longer period when not connected to the mains powersupply.

_______________________________________________________________________

�4


4 - 76.111.98.5.01.13

Battery icon display

1

EURO perkg EUR

Fig. 11: Display1 Battery icon

When connected to the mains:--- Battery icon not visible.

Scales is connected to the mains.The batteries are charged.

Arrow flashes slowlyBattery is being charged.

Arrow flashes very fastThe temperature of the battery is less than 0€C. A statement as to the chargedstate of the battery cannot be made.

When battery operated: Arrow flashes permanently

The charging of the battery is OK.

Arrow flashes fastWarning, batteries require charging.Depending on the age of the battery and the ambient temperature, it is possible tocontinue operations for about 60 minutes.�

Arrow flashes very fast. In addition, a permanent tone occurs for approx. 10 sec.The battery is empty. The device is switched off after 10 seconds.

�4


4 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.13

4.3 Commissioning

Commissioning, as well as instruction on the operation, cleaning, maintenance andservicing is carried out by the relevant Bizerba customer services office or the Bizerbatrade consultant.

4.3.1 Switch on device

Prerequisite- The device has been installed properly and connected to the mains power supply.

- The scale should not be loaded.

Switch device on/off, see page 6 - 1.

4.4 DecommissioningIf you wish to decommission the scale for a prolonged period of time,

- Switch the scale off.

- Remove the AC power plug and detach all cable connections.

- Clean the scale in accordance with the cleaning instructions.

�4

Operating instruction BC II Device and operating controls

5 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

5 Device and operating controls

5.1 Main switch

2

1

Fig. 12: BC II1 Main switch on BC II 8002 Main switch on BC II 100 and 200

�5

Operating instruction BC IIDevice and operating controls

5 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

5.2 Display

EURO perkg EUR

1

2

3

567

4

Fig. 13: Dot 7 display

The display is divided into:1 Dot Matrix (20x208 Dots)2 Lit icons3 Symbols printed on the glass panel (dependent on country)4 Light symbol for system identification5 Selling price6 Unit price

7 Weight value

5.2.1 Display icons

Type- and country-dependent icons designate different operating states.

The printed icons are marked by arrows that light up.

= Net display after taring process

= Prepack

= Battery operation/battery charging control,

= Unit price per kg

= Unit price per 100g

= Fixed unit price

= Constant unit price

= Operator number after registration

= Character for display of total

I = Symbol for single division scale

I I = Symbol for dual division scale

= Symbol for fixed weight for dot 7 display

= Symbol for fixed weight for 7 segment display

�5


5 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

5.3 Keyboard

_______________________________________________________________________

Keyboard designs are country-dependent.

_______________________________________________________________________

5.3.1 Membrane keyboard

There are two transparent modules on the membrane keyboard into which insert-foils canbe inserted if required.

1 Insert-foil 30 keys DEU(Country ID, e.g. DEU defines keyboardlabeling)

2 Insert-foil 54 keys DEU3 Membrane keyboard 54 keys

4 Membrane keyboard 30 keys

Fig. 14: Example of insert-foils

Example:

2

3

Fig. 15: Insert foil with 54 key

1

4

Fig. 16: Insert foil with 30 keys.

�5

1

2

3

4


5 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

5.3.2 Keyboard

1 Keyboard 84 keys

Fig. 17: Keyboard

5.3.3 Key functions

Fig. 18: Example of keyboard

�5

1


5 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

Key Function

11Tab

- 54 <PLU 1> to <PLU 54>

PLU = Price Look Up (product plus price, text, etc. is displayed)

19A

- 15Z

Non-numeric and special characters <A< to <Z> (function only in menu)

1 - Operator 1 <OP1> to Operator 4 <OP4>

<Paper feed>

- <Minus input>

) ]0 <Reset>

T1 <Fixed tare T1>

T1 - T4 <Fixed tare T1> to <Fixed tare T4>

<Scroll>

St <Cancellation>

A <Cancellation> (country-specific version)

Void <Cancellation> (country-specific version)

Mod <Mod>

Esc <Escape>

<Multiplication>

<Switch> / <Overwrite>

PLUMan <Switch> / <Overwrite> (country-specific version)

�5


5 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

Key Function

<Non-weighed>

<Constant>

F <Constant> (country-specific version)

Pre-pack <Constant> (country-specific version)

<Tare>

Tare <Tare> (country-specific version)

Ctrl <Control>

<Enter>

En-ter <Enter> (country-specific version)

<Shift>

<Clear> (delete)

Clr <Clear> (delete)

<Subtotal>

<Total>

<Print> (country-specific version)

�5


5 - 76.111.98.5.01.13

5.3.4 Keyboard options

Menu setting - Pr631 - 00 to 03 keyboard selection, see page 7 - 149

Additional frame with 24 keysAdditional frame for 24 PLUs.The additional frame is attached to the basic keyboard.

1

2

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18

19 20 21 22 23 24

Fig. 19: Additional 24PLU frame1 Additional frame2 Write-on insert

Front-foil with 30 keysFront-foil with 30 PLU keys.The front-foil is placed over the top of the basic keyboard.

1

2

Fig. 20: Front foil 30 PLU1 Front membrane2 Write-on insert

�5


5 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.13

5.4 PrinterModels BC II 100 to BC II 800 are equipped with receipt printer or label printer. Theprinters operate according to the thermal printing principle. The paper can only be printedon the thermal side.

5.4.1 Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200

Printer lid BC II 100/200

openThe printer lid 2 is marked on the top witharrows 3 .

Hold the printer lid at the positionsmarked by the 3 arrows.

Open the printer lid by pulling itdownwards.

Fig. 21: Printer lid BC II 100/200close

Fold the printer lid upwards.

Side cover BC II 100/ 200

Open

Hold the side cover 1 at the fluted grip.

Open the side cover pulling itdownwards.

close

Close the side cover by pulling itupwards.

Fig. 22: Side cover BC II 100/ 200

�5

2

3

1

1


5 - 96.111.98.5.01.13

Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800

Side cover BC II 800

Open

Hold the slide cover at the 1 grips.

Open the side cover pulling itdownwards.

close

Close the side cover by pulling itupwards.

Fig. 23: Side cover BC II 800

Printer lidThe printer lid is 2 marked at the bottom witharrows 3 .

Open

Take hold of the printer lid 2 at theplaces marked with the arrows. 3

Open the printer lid by pulling it upwards.

Fig. 24: BC II 800 Open printer lid

close

Fold the printer lid down 2 .

Fig. 25: BC II 800 Close printer lid

�51

2

3

2


5 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.13

5.4.2 Opening and closing the thermal print head

Label printer in BC II 100/200

open

Place one finger underneath the red gripelement 1 .

Pull the grip element 1 towards you untilthe thermal print head disengages andfolds down. 2

closeFig. 26: Label printer in BC II 100

Place your finger on the red grip element1 .

Press the thermal print head 2 upwardsagainst the printer roller and thenbackwards until the thermal print headengages.

Ticket and label printer BC 800

open

Place your index finger underneath thered grip element. 1 .

Push the grip element 1 upwards untilthe thermal print head disengages. 2

Fold the thermal print head upwards.

Fig. 27: Opening the thermal print head

close

Place your thumb on the red gripelement.

Push the thermal print head backwardsagainst the printer roller and thendownwards until the thermal print headengages.

Fig. 28: Closing the thermal print head

�5

2

1

1

2


5 - 116.111.98.5.01.13

5.4.3 Ticket printer

Ticket printer paper endThe paper end is indicated by a red mark on the paper. When this mark appears, insert anew ticket roll.

Insert ticket paper

Remove the empty ticket roll from thepaper feed. 2

Insert a new ticket roll into the paperfeed. 1

Pay attention to the direction of the ticketpaper.

Open the thermal print head 4 , seepage 5 - 10.

Fig. 29: Paper ticket printer

Push the ticket paper through the paperchute 6 , until the start of the roll 5 isabout 80 mm over the thermal printhead. 3

Close the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10.

Feed the ticket paper past the tear-offedge of the printer lid.

Close the printer lid.

�5

1

34

56

2


5 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.13

5.4.4 Label printer

End of labelAfter printing the last label, insert a new label roll.

Insert label roll

Open the side cover and printer lid, seepage 5 - 8.

Open the thermal print head,see page 5 - 10.

Remove the label roll from the take-uppin. 3 .

Pull the red peel-off unit 6 outwards.

Pull the backing paper off the take-uppin. 1

Pull 5 labels off the backing paper of thenew label roll.

Place the new label roll 4 on thetake-up pin. 3 .

Insert the backing paper in accordancewith the direction of the paper and attachit to the take-up pin. 1 .The Backing paper must be positionedon collar. 2

Press the red peel-off unit 6 inwards.

Fig. 30: BC II 100 Label printer

Turn the take-up pin 1 manually untilthe first label is peeled off.

Close the thermal print head, see page5 - 10.

Close the side cover and printer lid, seepage 5 - 8.

�53

1

54

2

6


5 - 136.111.98.5.01.13

Paper label printer

1 Take-up arbor for backing paper2 Collar3 Holding arbor4 Label roll5 Deflection pin with red adjustable ring6 Thermal strip7 Printer roller8 Label detachment shaft9 Deflection pin

10 Transport roller11 Deflection roller with adjustable ring

Abb. 31: Paper track in label printer /BC�II�800

1 Take-up arbor for backing paper2 Collar3 Holding arbor4 Label roll5 Deflection pin with red adjustable ring6 Thermal strip7 Printer roller8 Label detachment shaft9 Deflection pin

10 Transport rollerAbb. 32: Paper track in label printer /BC�II�100/200

Set width of paper

Adjust the red adjustable ring 5 to thedeflection roller by pushing it to the sizeof the label.This is necessary for each paper changeand when changing the paper width.

Fig. 33: Adjustable ring

�5

9

10

111

2

3

456

7

8

12 3

4567

8

910

5


5 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.13

�5

Operating instruction BC II Operation

6 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

6 Operation

6.1 Switching on device

The mains switch<On-Off> is located

- on the left side of the scale in the case of BCII 100 / BCII 200

- on the right side of the scale in the case of BCII 800.

The scale should not be loaded.

Press mains switch <On-Off>.

”Boot” appears in the display.

The display test occurs automatically.All digits and symbols are displayed for approx. 5 sec..

The weight value display is then automatically set to zero ”0.000” with thescale unloaded and is ready for weighing.

6.2 Switch off device

Press mains switch <On-Off>.

The display goes dark after a short time.

6.3 Zerosetting deviceAfter switching on the scale the weight display ranges automatically at zero ”0.000” kgprovided that the scale is unloaded.The scale has an automatic reset device, so that minor zero point changes arecompensated automatically.

The weight value display can (if the display is not set to zero) be reset again with the scaleunloaded.

) ]0 Press <Zerosetting>.

The weight value display indicates ”0,000” kg.

�6

Operating instruction BC IIOperation

6 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.4 Operating optionsOperating processes marked with an * are not available for all country versions.

Different operating types can be set in the device:

1. Multi-operating mode see page 6 - 2

2. Self-service operation see page 6 - 3

3. Quick-service operation see page 6 - 4

4. Price labeling with manual triggering * see page 6 - 5

5. Price labeling with automatic start * see page 6 - 6

6.4.1 Multiple-operator mode Multiple salespeople can operate the device at the same time.

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 Setting multi-operator mode - Pr 510/ 02 Setting ticket or label layout - Pr 505 Set type of paper - Setting Pr 520 submenu 01 to 08

General operating procedure

Place the article on the scale.

Input price

2! @

Press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU2>.

or

Enter the unit price directly, e.g. EUR 2.98

PLU registration

1 Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

Ticket layout: The article is registered but not printed.Label layout: The article is registered and the label is printed.

Printout of the article depends on the menu setting Pr520/02.

Conclude sale

Press <total>.

1 Press the operator key, e.g. <OP1>.

Ticket layout: Item and total are printed on ticket.Label layout: Printout of the article and the total depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02,

see page7 - 92.

�6


6 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

6.4.2 Self-service mode

_______________________________________________________________________

The article can only be called up via on PLU direct key.

- Only PLU direct keys under which weight articles are stored canbe called up. Piece PLU, manual PLU or minus PLU cannot becalled up - you hear an acoustic signal.

- Reports cannot be created in this operating mode._______________________________________________________________________

Menu setting - Pr 505 Setting label paper - Pr 510/ 01 -01 Setting self-service mode - Pr 510/ 02 1 Setting label layout

Operating procedure:


Print article

2! @

Press the PLU direct key of the article applied e.g. <PLU2>.

The label is printed.

�6


6 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.4.3 Quick-service mode

Register with operator key

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -03 Setting self-service mode - Pr 510/ 02 -1 Setting label layout - Pr521 -0 Recording with operator key



Call up article

2! @

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU2>.

Register article and print

1 Press operator key <VK1>.


or (dependent on country)

Press <Print>.


Register automatically

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -03 Setting self-service mode - Pr 510/ 02 -1 Setting label layout - Pr 521 -1 register automatically



Call up article, then register and print

2! @


It is registered to Operator 1.The label is printed.

�6


6 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

6.4.4 Price labeling with manual triggering *

Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 Price labeling with release by hand - Pr 510/ 02 -1 Label layout - Pr 525/ 01 Setting labeling mode

Call up article


2! @


The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.

Register article and print label



Remove the article from the scale.

Place the next article on the scale.


You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is calledup, or until the <C> key is pressed.

Create batch sum label *

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition

Press <total>.

The batch sum label is printed.

�6


6 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.4.5 Price labeling with automatic start *

Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -05 Price labeling with automatic release - Pr 510/ 02 -1 Label layout - Pr 525/ 01 Setting labeling mode

Call up article


3''


The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.

Register article and print label



Remove the article from the scale.

Place the article on the scale.The label is printed. Printing happens automatically after each change of weight.

You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is calledup, or until the <C> key is pressed.

Create batch sum label *

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition

Press <Total>.

The batch sum label is printed.

�6

1,50K

1

00 1,50K

15 1,50K

14 1,50K

00 1,50K

0,000 0, 00 0,00K


6 - 76.111.98.5.01.13

6.4.6 Piece price multi- label printing A number of identical price per piece labels can be created in price labeling mode.

Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 Price labeling - Pr525/ 02 -00-99 Time in sec. between printing of two labels


Input price.

4$

Press the PLU direct key for unit

price e.g. <PLU4>.The constant function 1 is activated.

Define number of labels

Press <Multiplication> .

Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.

PLU registration


The labels are printed. The number of labels being printed iscontinually displayed.

End

Press <C>.

�6

0,500 12, 00 6,00K

1

_ _K

15K

0,500 12, 00 6,00K


6 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.4.7 Fixed weight label multi-printing A number of identical fixed weight labels can be created in price labeling mode.

Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 Price labeling - Pr525/ 02 -00-99 Time in sec. between printing of two labels


4$

Press the PLU direct key for fixed

weight e.g. <PLU5>.The constant function 1 is activated.

Define number of labels

+ Press and hold <Shift>. Then press

<Multiplication>

Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15.

Press <Enter>

The number of labels is herewith confirmed.

PLU registration


The labels are printed.

End

Press <C>.

�6

0,556 0,00 0,00

0,556 8,56 4,76

Non-weighed 0,00

Non-weighed 8,65

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]

Non-weighed 0,00

Non-weighed 8,65

Non-weighed _0 8,65

Non-weighed _5 8,65

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]


6 - 96.111.98.5.01.13

6.5 Unit price input via 10-key keypad_______________________________________________________________________

With key you can switch between entry of unit price and PLU no.

Switchover depends on the setting in Pr 535.

_______________________________________________________________________

6.5.1 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

Unit price input Price/kg

Place article on the scale.

Enter the unit price.

Read off the selling price.

1 Register

e.g. on operator <VK1>.The selling price is saved to thebuffer.

Price per piece manual input

Press <non-weighed>.

Enter the price per piece,

e.g. 8.65

1 Register

e.g. on operator <VK1>.

Multiplication of price per piece non-weighed

Press <non-weighed>.


e.g. 8.65

Press <multiplication>.

Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5.

1 Register


�6

Minus 0,00

Minus - 1,00

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]

Minus 0,00

Minus - 1,00

Minus _0 - 1,00

Minus _5 - 1,00

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]


6 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.13

Entry of minus amount

- Press <Minus amount>.


e.g. 1.00

1 Register


Multiplication of minus amount input

- Press <Minus input>


e.g. 1.00



1 Register


�6

Op.0,00

[1]

8,60[1]

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]

Op.0,00

[1]

8,60[1]

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]


6 - 116.111.98.5.01.13

6.6 CancellationIf the sale is not yet completed (before final total), individual articles can be canceled.

Cancel lastly sold article

Pcs Press <Cancellation>.


The last items are displayed.

St Press <Cancellation>.

The displayed items are canceled.

Search for article by ”Scrolling” and cancellingSeveral articles have already been sold; a defined article is now to be canceled.




Scroll until the article you want appears on the display.


The displayed items are canceled.

Quit cancellationYou start the Cancel function and want to abort this without starting a cancellation.




Press <Clear>.

You have quit the Cancel function. The article is still registered.

�6


6 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.7 Scroll functionAfter selling several articles (before total completion) the single articles can be checked inthe display by<Scrolling>




<Scrolling>upwards.

The items are displayed in descending order.

Press <Clear>.

The scroll function is closed.

�6

Op.0,00

[1]

Total8,60

[1]

Op.0,00

[1]

Total8,60

[1]*


6 - 136.111.98.5.01.13

6.8 ConstantFix unit price or tare value, or unit price and tare value, e.g. for several sequenced sales ofthe same article. Depending on menu setting in Pr520/ 01.

PLU articles are fixated if you hold down the constant key, independent of the setting in Pr520/ 01.

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 01 Constant key function

Switch on fixing.The symbol illuminates before or (dependent on country).

Switch off fixing.The symbol before or goes out (depending on country)

6.9 SubtotalThe subtotal can be displayed (but not deleted) after the sale of one or more articles.

Press <Subtotal>.


The subtotal is displayed.

6.10 TotalThe final total occurs after the sale of one or more articles.

Press <Total>.


The total is displayed.The registered items and the total are printed.The buffer for operator 1 is cleared.

�6


6 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.11 Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU)

6.11.1 Calling up PLUs

Prerequisite - Pr 110/ PLU no/ Submenu 1 to 14 PLU articles are created

The PLU call can be implemented by two methods:

- Press the PLU direct key.- PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad.

PLU direct keyStored PLUs can be called up directly via PLU direct keys.

11Tab


The stored values for PLU 1 appear in the display.

Second level of PLU direct keysWith <Shift> twice as many PLUs can be accessed directly, as defined on the keyboard.

+ 11Tab

Press and hold <Shift> and then press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU1>.

The stored values for PLU 51, for example, appear in the display.

Example 1:There are 50 PLU direct keys on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift> +<PLU1> PLU 51 isaccessed.

Example 2:30 PLU direct keys are defined with Pr 631 on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift>+<PLU1> PLU 31 is accessed.

�6

PLU ___

PLU __1

Calf liver paté 0.002-0,002 12,55

PLU ___ ___1

Calf liver paté 0.002-0,002 12,55


6 - 156.111.98.5.01.13

PLU input with ten-digit keyboardThe input depends on the menu setting Pr5 35. As an example, select PLU�1:

Menu setting - Pr 535/01 -0 Ten-digit keyboard: Unit price input - Pr 535/ 02 Number of PLU input digits

Operating procedure

Press <Switching>,

and PLU number on the 10-key

keypad, e.g. <1>.

Confirm with <Enter>.

PLU 1 is displayed.

_______________________________________________________________________

Operating procedure- If all digits are entered, it must not be confirmed with <Enter>. The

PLU is displayed immediately.- If a delay time is set in Pr 535/ 06, the PLU is displayed after a time

delay. This must not be confirmed with <Enter>.

_______________________________________________________________________

or

Menu setting - Pr 535/01 -1 Ten-digit keyboard: PLU input - Pr 535/ 02 Number of PLU input digits

Operating procedure

Press the PLU number on the

ten-digit keypad, e.g. <1>.


PLU 1 is displayed.

�6

Smoked sausage1,50

Smoked sausage0 1,50

Smoked sausage22 1,50

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]


6 - 16 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.11.2 Operator sales with PLU

Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key.


11Tab


1 Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

”Overwrite” PLU unit price”.

The unit price for the article (PLU unit price) is stored. When the PLU is called up thesaved unit price is displayed. If price-overwriting is permitted, the unit price may bechanged. If the PLU is called up again, the stored unit price is still valid.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06-1 Price overwriting permissible


11Tab


Press <Switching>,

Enter the unit price, e.g. 20.30

1 Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces

Press a PLU direct key with storedarticle type is ”Non-weighed” or”Minus”, e.g. <PLU 4>.

Press <Multiplication>.


1 Register

e.g. on operator 1 <VK1>.

�6

Smoked sausage0,118 3,49 0,40



0,000 0,00 0,00[1]


6 - 176.111.98.5.01.13

Register manual weight input ( depending on country)

Menu setting - Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on. - Setting into operation see page 7 - 30

Press a PLU direct key with storedPLU type is ”Non-weighed” or”Minus”, e.g. <PLU 4>.


Enter the known weight, e.g.

0.220kg.

Press <Enter>

Entry confirmed, selling price isdisplayed.

1 Register

e.g. on operator 1 <VK1>.

�6

0,535 0,00 0,00

0,535 0,000 0,00 0,00

1 2

0,535 2,000 0,00 0,00

1 2

NET


6 - 18 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.12 Tare functions

6.12.1 Tare balancing for unknown tare values

_______________________________________________________________________

An unknown tare weight ( empties) is a non-article related tare which

is to be weighed and tared.

- For scales under a 10 kg weighing range, the entire weighingrange can be tared.

- For scales over a 10 kg weighing range, only up to max. 9.995 kg(max. 4-digit) can be tared (country-dependent).

- The tared value is subtracted from the total weighing range.

- The tare command is only directly executed when the weightdisplay is stationary.

- If an unknown tare was tared with key <Tare>, it cannot beoverwritten with a known tare (hand tare, PLU tare).

- After balancing an unknown tare, a PLU call is possible with PLUtare, but the PLU tare is ignored.

_______________________________________________________________________

Unknown tare

Weigh article as an empty with unknown weight.

Place the empty container on the scale.

The weight display 1 indicates the weight ofthe empty container e.g.: ”0,535” kg.

Press <tare>.

The tare display 2 indicates the weight of theempty container, ”0.535” kg.

The weight display 1 indicates zero.

Fill the empty container with the article.

The weight display 1 indicates the netweight of the article ”2,000” kg.

The tare display 2 indicates the weight ofthe empty container, ”0.535” kg.

�6

0,535 0,00 0,00

1

0,535 0,000 0,00 0,00

1 2

0,535 0,800 0,00 0,00

1 2

NET

1,353 0,000 0,00 0,00

1 2

NET


6 - 196.111.98.5.01.13

Batch tare (country-related)

Determine unknown tare, weigh article, add this to the tare weight and weigh the nextarticle net.

Place the empty container on the scale. The weight display 1 indicates theweight of the empty container, e.g.:”0,535” kg.

Press <Tare>.

The tare display 2 indicates the weightof the empty container, ”0.535” kg.The weight display 1 indicates zero.

Fill the empty container with the article. The weight display 1 indicates the netweight of the article ”0.800” kg.The tare display 2 indicates the weightof the empty container, ”0.535” kg.

Press <tare>.

Weight of article and of empty containerare added to the new tare weight 2 .The weight display 1 indicates zero.

For scales under 10 kg you can tare the entireweighing range.

�6

_,___ 0,000 0,00 0,00

_,_52 0,000 0,00 0,00

0,052-0,052 0,00 0,00

2

NET

1


6 - 20 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.12.2 Tare balancing for known tare values_______________________________________________________________________

Known tare

- When weighing a packaged article, the tare value must be known(packaging/product-related tare).

- For multiple-division scales, the known tare must always be locatedwithin the smallest division range (country-dependent).

- A known (input) tare cannot be overwritten by an unknown(weighed) tare.

- The known tare can be input by 2 methods:1. Manual tare2. Tare with PLU tare

_______________________________________________________________________

Manual tare (country-related)

_______________________________________________________________________

Manual taring is not allowed in various countries._______________________________________________________________________

Prerequisite - The scale should not be loaded. Weight value ”0,000” kg.

Press <Tare>.

The manual tare input is opened.

Enter the known tare value, e.g.

0,052 kg.

Press <Tare>.

The input tare value is accepted.The display shows the tare 2 value andthe net weight value 1 .

�6

Calf liver paté 0.002-0,002 0,00 0,00

NET

0,004-0,004 0,00 0,00

NET


6 - 216.111.98.5.01.13

PLU tare

Assign known tare value in menu Pr 110 to the respective PLU article.

Menu setting - Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03

Enter article-related tare values

The PLU tare value is activated and displayed via the PLU call.

11Tab

Press e.g. <PLU1>.

Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4

Menu setting - Pr 540 Allocate known tare values to the tare keys

T1 Press e.g. <Fixed tare T1>.

The saved tare value is displayed.

Tare clearing

1. Manual

Unload the scale.

Press <T>.

The display indicates zero.

2. Automatically

1 Register article, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

Unload the scale.The display indicates zero. The unit price is also deleted.

�6

0,060 0,00 0,00

Op.0,060 0,00 0,00

0,0600,000 0,00 0,00

0,060-0,060 0,00 0,00

0,000 0,00 0,00

Op.0,000 0,00 0,00

Op. -,- - -0,000 0,00 0,00

Oper. 0,0700,000 0,00 0,00

0,070-0,070 0,00 0,00

0,000 0,00 0,00


6 - 22 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.12.3 Operator tareAn operator can save a tare value on an operator key. This tare value can be called upany time.

Prerequisite - Pr 630 Key <Operator Tare> must exist. - Pr 630 Key <Save Operator Tare> must exist.

Save tare value weighedSave tare value of an empty container on operator key e.g. <OP1>.Operating procedure:

Place empty container on scale.

F12 <Press Save Operator Tare>.

1 Press operator key<OP1>.

Tare value is displayed.

Remove empty container from scale.

Press

Tare key <T>. The tare display is deleted. The tarevalue is saved under operator key<OP1>.

Save tare value entered

F13 <Press Save Operator Tare>.


The input field is displayed.

Enter tare value, e.g. 0.070kg.

Press tare key <T>.

Press tare key <T>.

The tare display is deleted. The tarevalue is saved under operator key<OP1>.

�6

Op.0,000 0,00 0,00

0,070-0,070 0,00 0,00


6 - 236.111.98.5.01.13

Call up operator tare savedScale is unloaded and in untared condition.

F13 Press<Operator Tare>.

”Oper.” is displayed.


The saved tare value is displayed.�6

1

2

3

4


6 - 24 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.13 Assisted sales with ticket

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode - Pr 510/ 02 -0 Ticket layout

Set the ticket paper at the label printer - Pr 505 -0 Ticket paper

Example: Operator 1 sells various articles that are programmed in the scale, cancels the lastarticle sold and concludes the sale with the total.

Apply article on scale

11Tab

Call up article (weighed) with PLU

direct key e.g. <PLU1>.

1 Register article on <OP1> 1 .

Remove product from the scale.

2! @

Call up next article (hand),

e.g. <PLU 2>.


3''

Call up next article (minus),

e.g. <PLU 3>.


Fig. 34: Print example

St Open cancellation function.

1 Press operator key<OP1>

St Confirm cancellation

Last item is canceled 4 .

Open total printing.


Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed, see printing example.

�6

1

3

2

4

Calf liver paté 0.0020,498 12,55 6,25

NET

Total6,25


6 - 256.111.98.5.01.13

6.14 Talon The talon includes the number of items and the total. It helps the operator checkeverything later. The talon is automatically printed after the total printout. A delay ofbetween 1 and 99 seconds can occur.The delay can be interrupted by pressing the <Total> key. The talon is then printedimmediately.

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 06 -01 up to 99 seconds delay in printing

1 Ticket counter 2 Operator number3 Total4 No. of items

Fig. 35: Talon example

6.15 Print ticket upon requestIn multi-operation mode the ticket printout can be triggered after sales process is finished,if requested. If the key combination<Shift> and <OP> is not pressed, the total occurs onlyin the display.

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 11 -0 Print ticket only upon request

Operating procedure: Ticket printing upon request


11Tab

Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.

1 Register article on <OP1>.

Press<Total>


The total is displayed.

On request:

+ 1 <Press> Shift and press then operator key <OP1>.

The ticket is printed.

�6

12


6 - 26 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.16 Repeat ticket

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 07 -1 with -Repeat ticket-

The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.

Prerequisite - Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.

+ 1 Press and hold <Shift>. Then

press operator key 1 <OP1>

A copy is printed.

You can tell the copy from theoriginal by the asterisk 1 after theticket number 2 .

Fig. 36: Repeat ticket

6.17 Open ticket again

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 08 -1 with -Re-open ticket-

If the customer requires further items after printout of the ticket, a completed ticket can bere-opened.

There are 2 ways of opening a ticket again.

- Open the last ticket via the operator key.- Open a ticket via the ticket number

�6

____

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]

____

___8

0,000 0,00 0,00[1]


6 - 276.111.98.5.01.13

6.17.1 Open the last ticket via the operator key.

Prerequisite - Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.

Open the last ticket:

Ctrl + Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

press <Enter>.

1 Press operator key e.g.

OP1<.>

The last ticket is now open. Additional articles may now be sold.

Finalize the re-opened ticket:

Press <Total>.

1 Press <OP1>.

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.

6.17.2 Open the ticket via ticket number

Open ticket again:

Ctrl + Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

press <Enter>.

Enter the ticket number<8>

press <Enter>

Ticket no. 8 is open again. The operator number is shown in the display.Additional articles can be sold via the displayed operator number.

Finalize the re-opened ticket:

Press <Total>.

1 Press e.g.<OP1>.

Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.

�6


6 - 28 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.17.3 Overwrite VAT from PLUA VAT rate is assigned to PLU. If PLU is called up, a different VAT rate can be assigned tothe PLU with the VAT key.

Prerequisite - Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 20 -1 The PLU is assigned to a VAT rate number from 1-5. - Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 -1 The VAT can be overwritten. - Pr630 The VAT key can be found on the keyboard. - Pr631/ 03 re-programmed keyboard is set



11Tab

Call up article with PLU direct key, e. g. <PLU 1> with VAT number 1 (19%)

II Press VAT key, e. g. with VAT number 2 (7%)


Article is registered with 7% VAT

Press<Total>


The ticket is printed. After <Total> VAT from PLU is assigned to article.

�6


6 - 296.111.98.5.01.13

6.18 Serviced selling with label layout

Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode - Pr 510/ 02 -1 Label layout - Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition of customer total - Pr 520/ 02 -2 Only print article label

Example: Operator <OP1> sells different articles that are programmed in the scales, andcancels the article last sold.

Place article on the scale.

11Tab

Call up article (weighed) via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.


The label is printed immediately.

Remove article from the scale.

2! @

Call up next article (hand),

e.g. <PLU 2>.



3''

Call up next article (minus), e.g. <PLU 3>.



St Open cancellation function.


St Cancel

Last item is canceled.No label is printed for a cancellation.

Display total

1 Press <Total> and operator e.g. <OP1>

in sequence.The total is displayed. No total label is printed.

�6

Smoked sausage 3 1,50


6 - 30 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.19 By Count article_______________________________________________________________________

The By Count article type must be put into operation, see page7 - 30.

_______________________________________________________________________

Sell By Count article

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ 07 -3 By Count article type - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - PR 110/ 15 -1 with back calculation (price per piece is printed on label)

Operating procedure

4$

Call up by-count article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.


The label with the package price 1

and the price per piece 2 is printed.

The price per piece is not printed on theticket.

�6

By-Count

12

Fig. 37: By Count label (1)


Quantity 3 1,50

Quantity 5 2,50


6 - 316.111.98.5.01.13

By Count with mandatory input of number of piecesThe stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. The package price isrecalculated.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 Article type by-count (price per package in relation to

number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - PR 110/ 15 -1 with back calculation (price per piece) - Pr 110/ 16 -1 with mandatory input

Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces

4$

Call up by-count article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU1>.Input of number of pieces is required

Enter number of pieces, e.g. <5>

The new number of pieces per packageand the calculated package price aredisplayed.


The label with the new packageprice� 1 and the price per piece� 2 isprinted.


�6

By-Count

12






6 - 32 6.111.98.5.01.13

By Count with overwriting of package priceThe set package price can be overwritten. The price per piece is recalculated.


number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - PR 110/ 15 -1 with back calculation (price per piece) - PR 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permitted

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price

4$

Call up by-count article via PLU

direct key e.g. � �<PLU 4>.

Press <Switch>

The package price is set to”0.00”

Enter new package price

e.�g.�5.00


The label with the new packageprice� 1 and the price per piece� 2 isprinted.


�6

By-Count

12








6 - 336.111.98.5.01.13

By Count with overwriting of package price and number of piecesThe stored package price is overwritten. This changes the price per piece. The storednumber of pieces per package is then overwritten. The package price and the price perpiece are recalculated.



Operating procedure with overwriting of package price and number of pieces

4$



Press <Switch>



e.�g.�<5.00>

Press key <Multiplication>

The number of pieces is setto ”0”

Enter number of pieces,

e.�g�<5>The new number of pieces andthe calculated package price aredisplayed.


The label with the calculated packageprice� 1 and the calculated price perpiece� 2 is printed.


�6

By-Count

12








6 - 34 6.111.98.5.01.13

By Count with overwriting of number of pieces and package priceThe stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. This changes the packageprice. The final package price is then entered. The price per piece is recalculated.



Operating procedure with overwriting of number of pieces and package price

4$



Press key <Multiplication>

The number of pieces is setto ”0”.


e.�g�<5> The package price changes.

Press <Switch>



e.�g.�<0.75>


The label with the entered finalpackage price� 1 and the calculatedprice per piece is printed.� 2


�6

By-Count

12


Tin of sausage 0,125 2,20 0,28


6 - 356.111.98.5.01.13

6.20 Fixed weightThe stored fixed weight of the article is used for price calculation instead of the weighedweight._______________________________________________________________________

The fixed weight article type must be put into operation like the ByCount article type, see page 7 - 30.

_______________________________________________________________________

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per fixed weight) - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Type fixed weighed - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib - Pr 110/PLU no./17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

Operating procedure

22F

Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU 22>.


The ticket with selling price 1 andfixed weight is printed. 2

Fixed weight with mandatory inputThe fixed weight must always be entered in the sale.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01

Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Type fixed weighed - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight

�6

Fixed weight

1

2

Fig. 42: Fixed weight (1)

Tin of sausage 0,125 220 0,28

Fixed weight 0,000

Fixed weight 0,150



6 - 36 6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating procedure with mandatory input of fixed weight

22F

Call up fixed weight article via

PLU direct key e.�g.�<PLU 22>.

Fixed weight input is required.

Enter new fixed weights,

e.�g�<0150>.

Press <Enter> key.

The new fixed weight and thecalculated selling price aredisplayed.


The new fixed weight� 1 and the sellingprice� 2 are printed.

Fixed weight with overwriting of unit priceThe stored unit price can be overwritten.


Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Type fixed weighed - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib - Pr 110/PLU no./17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article) - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 Price overwriting permissible

�6

Fixed weight

2

1






6 - 376.111.98.5.01.13

Operating procedure for fixed weight with unit price overwriteThe selling price is determined with the new unit price and the stored fixed weight.

22F



Press <Switch>

The price is set to ”0.00”.

Enter new unit price, e.�g.�<200>.


The new unit price � 2 and thecalculated selling price� 1 are printed.

Change fixed weight


Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Type fixed weighed - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib - Pr 110/PLU no./17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

�6

Fixed weight

1

2



Tin of sausage 0,000 2,20



6 - 38 6.111.98.5.01.13

Operating procedure for changing fixed weight

22F




The selling price disappears andthe fixed weight is set to ”0.000”.

Enter new fixed weight,

e.�g�<0150>. The calculated selling price isdisplayed.


The new fixed weight� 1 and thecalculated selling price� 2 are printed.

�6

Fixed weight

1

2




6 - 396.111.98.5.01.13

6.21 By Count fixed weightIn the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.

Sell By Count fixed weight article

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 07-5 By Count fixed weight article type (fixed weight and

price refer to pieces per package) - Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

Operating procedure

21D

Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU

direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.


Fixed weight 1 and selling price 2

are printed.

�6

By Count fixed weight

1

2

Fig. 46: By Count fixed weight (1)


Fixed weight 0,000

Fixed weight 0,500



6 - 40 6.111.98.5.01.13

By Count fixed weight with mandatory inputThe stored fixed weight per package must be overwritten.

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight article type - Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) - Pr 110/ 19-1 with mandatory input of fixed weight

Operating procedure for By Count fixed weight with mandatory input

21D

Call By Count fixed weight article

via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>. Fixed weight input is required.

Enter new fixed weight,

e.�g�<0500> g.

Press <Enter> key.

The selling price remains thesame. The price per kg changesbut is not displayed.


The altered price per kg � 1 and thenew fixed weight 2 are printed.

�6


1


2





6 - 416.111.98.5.01.13

Change number of pieces

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight type - Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

Operating procedure for changing the number of pieces

21D


via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.


The number of pieces is set to ”0”.


e.�g�<5>

The calculated selling price andthe new fixed weight are displayedimmediately.


The new fixed weight� 1 and thecalculated selling price� 2 are printed.

�6


1

2



Number of pieces 0,250 3 2,10

Number of pieces 0,583 7 4,90


6 - 42 6.111.98.5.01.13

By Count fixed weight with mandatory input of number of piecesThe stored number of pieces per package must be overwritten.

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight type - Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) - Pr 110/ 16-1 with mandatory input of number of pieces

Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces

21D



Input of number of pieces is required


e.�g�<7>

The calculated selling price andthe new fixed weight are displayedimmediately.


The new package price 1 and thenumber of pieces � 2 are printed.

�6


1

2






6 - 436.111.98.5.01.13

By Count fixed weight with overwriting of the package priceThe set package price can be overwritten. The price per kg is recalculated.

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight article type - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) - Pr 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permissible

Operating procedure with overwriting of package price

21D



Press <Switch>

The package price is set to”0.00”.


e.�g.�<500>


The new package price� 1 and the newkg price� 2 are printed.

�6


12


Op.0,00

[1]

Total2,71

* [1]

Payment out0,00

* [1]

Payment in5,00

* [1]

Payment out2,29

* [1]


6 - 44 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.22 Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out

Menu setting - Pr 520/ 04 Cash register function - Pr 520/ 05 Payment in/out - Pr 550/ 12 -1 Print out amount paid in/due on ticket

Operating procedure

Record the article.

Press <Total>.

1 Press the operator key, e.g.

<OP1>.

The customer pays the exact amount

If exact amount, close sales

with total key.

The ticket is printed and the cash drawer opens.

Customer pays, for example with 5.00 €

Enter the amount.

Delete the incorrect entry with <C> and enter the amount again.

Save input.

The ticket is printed, the cashdrawer opens and the change isindicated.

�6

0,206 12,55 2,59

__

0 2

0,206 12,55 2,59


6 - 456.111.98.5.01.13

6.23 Product with data of origin

When selling beef, for example, the customer should be provided with information onorigin, rearing, place of slaughter and possibly breed. The beef is marked with atraceability number, which is entered when sold.

Traceability data is printed on the ticket or label for the serviced selling mode and pricelabeling.

The weight of the sold meat and the number of items are saved in the traceability datasales report.

There are two possible operating procedures for products with data of origin:

- Input traceability no. manually.- Use defined traceability no.

6.23.1 Sale with manual input of the traceability number

PrerequisiteTraceability texts have to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no. 10.PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 with traceability number - Pr 515/ 03 - 1 Input traceability no. manually

Operating procedure

Place the beef, for example, on the scales.

11Tab

Press the PLU direct key

e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).

If the product contains traceabilitydata, the weight, unit price andselling price are only displayedbriefly.

A prompt to input the abbreviatedtraceability number then appears.

Enter the traceability number, e.g. 02.

Traceability number 02 corresponds to PLU number 9902.

Confirm the entry.

The weight, unit price and sellingare are displayed again.

1 Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.

�6


6 - 46 6.111.98.5.01.13

6.23.2 Sale with fixed traceability number.

PrerequisiteA traceability text has to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no./10.PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 with traceability number - Pr 515/ 04 - 00-99 Define traceability number - Pr 515/ 03 - 2 Use defined traceability no.

All products (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text from theset traceability number.

Operating procedure

Place the beef, for example, on the scales.

11Tab

Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).

If the product includes traceability data, the set traceability number isautomatically processed. The weight, unit and selling price are displayed. Thetraceability numbers is not displayed.

1 Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.

The sold quantity is booked separately in the traceability data sales report.

�6

0,000 0,00 0,00kg T kg Price/kg Price

1 2 3

PASS ______

PASS

Operating instruction BC II Programming

7 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

7 ProgrammingMenus marked with an asteriks *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for allcountry versions.

7.1 Initial displayIf the display is assigned, press <C>.

1 Net weight display 2 Unit price display3 Selling price display

Fig. 51: Initial display

7.2 Menu password

No passwordThe device is supplied without a password.Menu call-up is carried out with having to enter a password.

With password Activate password entry, see Pr 690 on page7 - 150.

Once the password input has been activated, acorrect password has to be entered.The password consists of 6 figures.

An symbol appears in the display for eachfigure that is entered.

If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.

�7

Pr

Pr115 01

Pr115 _2

Pr115 02 ____11-999999

Pr115 02 000011-____25

Operating instruction BC IIProgramming

7 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.3 Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menuMenu call-up is executed from the scales' output display.

General programming sequence

1. Menu call-up Press the <Mod>key.

2. Menu selectionEnter the program number via the 10-key keypad.

3. Submenu selection Enter the submenu number and confirm with the <Enter> key.

4. Make settingsConfirm settings with <Enter> key.

5. Exit menuPress the <Mod>key.

Example:Menu call-up

Call up menu

Menu selection

Select menu

Submenu selection

Select submenu, e.g. 2 print

PLU list

confirm

Make settings

Enter the start to the range,

e.g. PLU no.11

confirm

Enter the end of the range,

e.g. PLU no.25

confirm

The list, from PLU no. 11 to PLU no. 25, is printed.

Exit menu

Exit menu.

The scale returns to the initial display.

�7

Pr

Pr505 1

Pr505 0


7 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

Input correctionError inputs can be undone by pressing key <Clear>.Press key <Escape> to go to previous level, the old values remain intact.

Key <Clear>to clear entry.

Esc Use key <Escape> to go to previous level.

_______________________________________________________________________

If single items were registered and no total has been created, it is notpossible to switch to the programming mode.

The operator accounts have to be closed.

_______________________________________________________________________

7.4 Initial scale setting

Set the type of paper to be used.

Call up menu

Select menu

Select type of paper

0= Ticket paper1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)

confirm

Set the desired main operating mode.

Set main operating mode and print layout in menu Pr510, see page 7 - 84 and 7 - 107.

e.g. setting multi-operating mode Pr510/01 -01and ticket layout Pr 510/ 02-0Design ticket Pr 550, see page 7 - 107

Set the required switching operation mode.

Set switching operation mode and print layout in menu Pr511, see page 7 - 86 and 7 - 114.

e.g. setting multi-operating mode Pr511/01 -01and label layout Pr 511/ 02-1Design label Pr 555, see page 7 - 114

�7

10

1

2

3

4

56

78

9

11

1

2

3

4


7 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.5 Overview of list

Prerequisite - Insert the ticket paper for scales with a label printer. - Pr 505 -0 Select ticket paper

7.5.1 PLU articleprint, see Pr 115, page 7 - 50Create see Pr 110, on page7 - 39

1 Scale number 2 Unit price3 Tare

4 Article with data of origin5 Price overwriting permissible6 PLU text7 Shelf-life days8 Barcode9 Product group number

10 PLU number / article number11 Date and time

Fig. 52: Article list

7.5.2 Header and footer textsprint, see Pr 205/ 02 on page 7 - 55Create see Pr 201, on page7 - 53

1 Scale number 2 Enter header or footer text3 Text number

4 Date and time

Fig. 53: Header and footer text list

�7

12

3

4

123

4

12


7 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

7.5.3 Additional texts see Pr 205/ 01 on page 7 - 55Create see Pr 200, on page7 - 52

1 Scale number 2 Supplement. text3 Text number

4 Date and time

Fig. 54: Suppl. text list

7.5.4 Scrolling message Print, see Pr 205/ 03 page 7 - 55Create see Pr 202, on page7 - 54

1 Scale no 2 Scrolling message text3 Scrolling message number

4 Date and time

Fig. 55: Scrolling message list

7.5.5 PLU direct keys print, see Pr 536, page 7 - 103change see Pr 535 on page 7 - 100

1 PLU number (article no.) 2 PLU direct key

Fig. 56: PLU direct keys

�7

123456

7 8 9

12

3

4


7 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.5.6 Barcode structure , see Pr 211, page7 - 62Create see Pr 210, on page7 - 58

1 Structure number 2 Barcode format3 Field 1 code constant

4 Content field 15 Field 2 part string from PLU6 No. of digits for field 27 Field 3 price8 No. of digits for field 39 Conversion of variable values

Fig. 57: Barcode structures

7.5.7 BLD labels BLD= Bizerba Label Designer.Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.

Printout of BLD label numbers.

Print list, see Pr 220/01, see page7 - 68Delete list, see Pr 225/01, see page 7 - 68.

Create layout with BLD. Example of BLD label see page 7 - 115.

1 Scale number 2 Label name (enter in BLD)3 Label name (enter in BLD)

4 Date and time

Fig. 58: Example of BLD label list

�7

1

23

5

4


7 - 76.111.98.5.01.13

7.5.8 Logos Printout of logo saved in the scales.

_______________________________________________________________________

Logos can be designed in the BLD. The BLD logos are given anumber and sent to the scales where they are stored.

If a logo exists in the scales with the same number, the existing logo isreplaced by the BLD logo.

If this BLD logo is deleted in the scales (Pr 225/02) the previous logostored under this number is available again.

_______________________________________________________________________

Print, see Pr 220/ 02 on page 7 - 68Delete see Pr 225/02, see page 7 - 69

1 Scale number 2 Logo name3 Logo

4 Logo ID5 Date and time

Fig. 59: Example of logo list

�7


7 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.5.9 VAT ratesPrinting saved VAT rates.

Print see Pr 231/ 01 on page 7 - 71Delete see Pr 231/02, see page 7 - 71Create see Pr 230, on page7 - 69

1 VAT number2 VAT rate3 VAT text4 Including or excluding VAT

�71

2

3 4

123

Pr200 C 1500 LI H-

l H1 _15_

^15;I C 1496 L1 H 15


7 - 96.111.98.5.01.13

7.6 General procedure for text input Texts are entered in the program menus:- Pr 200 supplementary text,

- Pr 201 header and footer texts

- PR 202 scrolling message

- Pr110/ PLU no. / 10 PLU article texts

1 Font type 2 Line number (line 1)3 Available memory space (in byte)

Fig. 60: Example of display

Font HH- The font is determined by the selected layout (ticket or label)H15 The font type is 15 (Script 15).

Change font 1

Clr + Press and hold <CTRL>. Then press <0>.

Enter the font, e.g.15

Press key<Enter>.

The font is now Script 15. Also forthe following lines

_______________________________________________________________________

The font can be changed any time. Within the text of a line or in thenext line. The last font set applies until the next change.

_______________________________________________________________________

The overview of font types (script) in the scalecan be printed out via Pr 702.

Fig. 61: Font 4-9

�7

Pr200 C 1499 L2 H15

Pr200 C 1499 L2 H15


7 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.13

Change line 2

45CR

Press key <CR> for the next

line.

Change up and down between existing lines.

Save entry

Press key<Enter>.

Keys with alpha and special charactersLower case is generally selected by pressing the key.

Character a:

19A

Press key<19>.

Character A:

+ 19A

Press and hold key <Shift>,

then press key <19>.

If there are 2 characters on a key, these must be called up as follows:

Character ß:

39ß ?

Press key<39>.

Character ?:

Ctrl + 39ß ?

Press and hold key <Control>.

then press key<39>.

�7

Pr200 C 1500 LI H-

l UCd _____

l UCd __8364

| C 1498 LI H-

Pr200 C 1500 LI H-

l UCH ____

l UCH _20Ac

| C 1498 LI H-


7 - 116.111.98.5.01.13

Special character:

Example of decimal input of unicode characters.

Character I:

Ctrl + Press and hold <Ctrl>.

then press <4>.

Press the decimal figures for

the unicode for the desiredcharacter.


Enter example of hex value input.

Character I:

Ctrl + Press and hold <Ctrl>.

then press <2>.

19A

30C

Enter the hex value for the

requested character.


�7


7 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.13

CTRL Sequences in the editor

Shortcuts Function

CTRL + 0 Change font

CTRL + 1 Activate and deactivate Pinyin modeOnly for Chinese programand dot seven display. 1

CTRL + 2 Enter Unicode hexadecimal number

CTRL + 3 GB 3212 modeOnly for Chinese program

CTRL + 4 Enter Unicode decimal number

1 In Pinyin Mode there is an automatic switching in the Pinyin input, if a character A to Zis selected in the Editor.

�7


7 - 136.111.98.5.01.13

Function keys of text input

delete final character

Delete line

8 9 Move cursor in text to the left or right

Control printout of current text line

Control printout of all text lines

Text exampleEnter article text, e.g.: Raclètte cheese

+ 13R

R

19A

30C

27L

acl

Ctrl + è

14T

14T

12E

tte

44SP

Space

+ 26K

K

41Ä

20S

12E

Cheese

Control printout: Raclètte cheese

�7

Pr202 01

Pr202 02

l C 500 LI H-


7 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.7 Overview of scrolling messages

Define scrolling message text- Define in Pr 202

Select 202

Scrolling message for text number input

01-99

Press <Enter> key.

Scrolling message for text input,e.g.”&Z, You are being served by &B04; Mr. Müller”For text input, see page 7 - 9.

Control characters:- &Z;= Display character-by-character

- &W;= Display word-by-word (standard)

- &Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)

- &Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)

_______________________________________________________________________

To control the text, the control characters must be entered infront of the text and concluded with a <; > semicolon. Thecontrol characters can be entered at any point between the text.

_______________________________________________________________________

Scrolling message

Menu setting - Pr 516/ 01 -01 Select scrolling text number.

- Pr 516/ 02 -2 Select display location e.g. 2= Scrolling message on operatorand customer sideor

- Pr 516/ 02 -1 Select display location e. g. 1= Scrolling message on operatorsideor

- Pr 516/ 02 -0 Select display location e. g. 0= Scrolling message oncustomer side

- Pr 516/ 03 -1 Scrolling message starts with empty display

�7

Pr210 03 01040

Pr210 04

Pr210 03

Pr210 03 12030

Pr210 04

l 04 C 291 L11 H-


7 - 156.111.98.5.01.13

7.8 Barcode overview Procedure:

1. Create barcode structure

- Pr 210 Enter structure number- Pr 210/01 Define barcode format (EAN 13 or code 128)- Pr 210/ 02 Enter constant

- Pr 210/03 Define numeric value_______________________________________________________________________

If several numeric values are defined for a barcode, Menu Pr210/ 03 must be called up again for each value. Only pressnumeric key <3> and confirm with <Enter>.

_______________________________________________________________________

- Pr 210/ 03 Define another numeric value- Pr210/ 04 Save structure

ExampleStructure number (Pr 210), code format (Pr 210/ 01) and constant ( Pr 210/ 02) areentered.Further operating procedure for numeric value input:

Confirm submenu 03

Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversione.g. 01040 (price)

Confirm input

Submenu 4 is displayed

Presskey <3>

Select submenu 03 again

Confirm submenu 03

Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversione.g. 12030 (department no.)

Confirm input


Confirm submenu 04

Save code structure

The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structuremust be re-entered from the beginning.

�7

Barcode


7 - 16 6.111.98.5.01.13

2. Release barcode printing Ticket- Pr 550/ 01 Release barcode print on ticket for product, total and talon.- Pr 550/ 02 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.

Label- Pr 555/ 06 Release barcode print on label for article, total.- Pr 555/ 07 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.

3. Allocate barcodeThe barcode can be produced for the following data:

Articles not saved in the scales:- Non-PLU weighed articles Pr 215/02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- Non-PLU non-weighed articles Pr215/03. . . . . . . . . . . . .

- Non-PLU minus articles Pr215/ 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- Total Pr215 /05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Articles saved in the scales:- Article (PLU) Pr 110/PLU no./ 05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- For all articles (PLU) Pr 211/ 03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Barcode types:

Manufacturer code EAN 13 see page 7 - 17The manufacturer's barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to thearticle e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04.

Instore EAN 13see page 7 - 18A code structure must be defined for the EAN 13 code. Definition in Pr 210.Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an article in Pr110/PLU no/05 orall articles in Pr 211 /03.EAN 13 printout has 13 digits.

Code 128 see page 7 - 23A code structure must be defined for Code 128. Definition in Pr�210.Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an article in �Pr110/PLU no/05 orall articles in Pr �211 /03.Code 128 printout can be any width. The barcode is limited by the possible printing area.

�7

Manufacturer code WAN 13

1 2

Pr110 05 1 400151300062

Country digit Manufacturernumber

Article number Check digit


7 - 176.111.98.5.01.13


13 digits have to be entered for the manufacturer code.

Enter numbers 1400151300062.

The first digit 1 identifies the entry asthe manufacturer code and is not printed.

1 Code digit for code format1= manufacturer code

Fig. 62: Entering the manufacturer code

The following 12 digits are converted intoa barcode and are printed as they areentered 2 .The last digit is a check digit created bythe scale 3 .

Fig. 63: Print manufacturer code

_______________________________________________________________________

There are different types of barcode. One of the most commonbarcodes is the 13-digit code for consumer articles. The followingexample shows how the barcode is broken down:

- The country digit indicates in which country a manufacturer hasapplied for the barcode. The numbers 400 to 440, for example,stand for Germany.

- The manufacturer number provides information on the producerand is issued by GS1 Germany.

- The article number is specified by the manufacturer. Each articlehas its own number and can therefore be identified worldwide.

- The check digit is a number that has been calculated from all theother digits. It helps to avoid reading errors in the scanner.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7


2 3


7 - 18 6.111.98.5.01.13

Instore code EAN 13 A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code.The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales. The numberof digits per field is also defined in the structure.

Menu setting - Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03 Create structure - Pr 210/ 04 Check and save structure

12 digits must be defined for EAN 13.The number of available 12 digits is divided into fields in the barcode structure. Each fieldcan be set individually in Pr210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The fields are counted from left toright._______________________________________________________________________

Several encoded values (fields) can be set in a row, to do sore-access submenu 02 or 03 .

The number of digits in all fields must be exactly 12.

If this is more or less, the structure is rejected.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7

Instore code EAN 13


7 - 196.111.98.5.01.13

Example: Code structure for in-store code EAN 13 with 3 fields12 digits are available for printing. The 13th digit is a check number from the scale.

1 2 3

Fig. 64: Code digit (Field 1), Substring/Constant (Field 2), Selling Price (Field 3)

Menu Input example Note Printing in field

Pr 210 02 Code structure number Use this structurenumber in Pr 110/PLU no./ 05 orPr 211/ 03Pr 215/ 02Pr 215/ 03Pr 215/ 04Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 01 00002 Code EAN 13 with OCR

Pr 210/ 02 22 Code digit for price2 Digits

Field 1 (code digit)

Pr 210/ 03 05040 Substring/Constant4 Digits

Enter field 2 (sub‐string) inPr 110/ PLU-No./05 orPr 215/ 02Pr 215/ 03Pr 215/ 04Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 03 01060 Selling price6 Digits

Field 3 (Price)

Pr 210/ 04 Check and save struc‐ture

�7

Instore code EAN 13

Pr21002

1

Pr210 01 10002

2 3 4 5

22 02 C 18 LI H-

5

Pr210 03 05040

6 7 8


7 - 20 6.111.98.5.01.13

Example:

Create barcode structure in Pr210The following in-store barcode is to be printed:Code digits price in Euro (22), substring from PLU (0815), price (total).1 Barcode structure no. e.g. 02

Define barcode format Submenu 012 Barcode types

0= EAN 13; 1= code 1283 Height of barcode

00= Barcode height is taken from PR550/02, Pr555/07 or from BLD layout.4 OCR line

0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel

Define code digits (Field 1)Submenu 02 (code constant) 5 e.g. 22 for price code in Euro according to

GS1 Germany

Define substring (Field 2)Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code

05= Substring from e.g. 110/05 (PLU):or 215/ 02 (Non-PLU weighed)or 215/ 03 (Non-weighed articles)or 215/ 04 (Minus articles)or 215/ 05 (Total)

7 Number of digits for field 204= four digits for constant

8 Conversion of variable values0=If in ”Numeric code” <05>= part string was selected, <0> must always be eneteredfor the ”conversion of the variable values”.

�7

Instore code EAN 13

Pr210 03 01060

119 10

Pr210 04 C 302 L11 H-

Pr215 05 0 02 0815000000

12 13 14 15

1614 155


7 - 216.111.98.5.01.13

Define price barcode (Field 3)Submenu 03 (Numeric code) 9 Numeric code (encoded value)

01= price10 Number of digits for field 3

06= 6 digits for the price11 Conversion of variable values

0= Decimal places as per device setting

Check and adopt code structureConfirm submenu 04

confirm

Assign instore code code structure e.g in Pr 215/ 05 (total) 12 Code digit for barcode type

0= Instore code13 Barcode structure no. e.g. 02

The code structure is saved in Pr 210 underthis number.

14 Constant is freely selectablee.g. 4-digit article no. ”0815”The number of digits depends on thenumber of digits for the part string 7 .

15 The remaining digits are without meaning,but must be assigned. Input: ”000000”

16 Scale check digit

Fig. 65: Printout example for instore codeEAN 13

�7

Instore code EAN 13

Pr110 05 0 02 0815 000000


7 - 22 6.111.98.5.01.13

Example:

In-store code for a PLU no.

Printing of the barcode depends on the setting in the barcode structure.

6-digit coded value without check digit

5 Field 1: 2 digits for code constante.g. 22 for price code in Euro

7 Field 2: 4 digits for part stringe.g. article number 0815

10 Field 3: 6 digits for coded value e.g. price 0022, 14€


Fig. 66: Example of EAN 13 in-store codewithout check digit

5 digit coded value with check digit

5 Field 1: 2 digits for code constante.g. 22 for price code in Euro

7 Field 2: 4 digits for part stringe.g. article number 0815

17 Field 3:1 digit check digitfor encoded value

10 Field 4: 5 digits for coded valuee.g. price 022, 14€


Fig. 67: Example of EAN 13 in-store codewith check digit

�7

Instore code EAN 13

161075

7 10 16175


7 - 236.111.98.5.01.13

Code 128 Code 128 contains the information in the dashes and spaces. The dash widths and thewidth of the spaces vary, depending on the code content.ASCII characters from ASCII 0 to ASCII 127 can be represented. This includes thecharacter set A, B and C. The specifications of code 128 can be found in Directive EN799.The length of the code is variable.

Menu setting - Pr 210/ structure number/ 01, 02, 03 Create code - Pr 210/ 04 Check digit and save if valid

The structure of Code 128 is defined in Pr 210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03.The code constant is defined in Pr 210/ 02.The encoded values are selected in Pr 210/ 03, see page 7 - 59._______________________________________________________________________

Several encoded values can be set in a row, to do so re-callsubmenu 02 or 03.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7

Code 128


7 - 24 6.111.98.5.01.13

Example: Code structure for code 128 with 6 fieldsAny number of fields

1 2 3 4 5 6

Fig. 68: Text (Field 1), Selling price (Field 2), PLU no. (Field 3), Weight (Field 4), Unit price(Field 5), Department number (Field 6)

Menu Input example Note Printing in field

Pr 210 10 Code structure number Use this structurenumber in Pr 110/05 orPr 211/ 03Pr 215/ 02Pr 215/ 03Pr 215/ 04Pr 215/ 05

Pr 210/ 01 1000 Code 128 with OCR

Pr 210/ 02 ABCD Code constant Field 1 (Text)

Pr 210/ 03 01040 Selling pricewith4 digits

Field 2(Selling price)

Pr 210/ 03 06040 PLU no.with4 digits

field 3 (PLU no)

Pr 210/ 03 02040 Weightwith4 digits

Field 4 (Weight)

Pr 210/ 03 08040 Unit pricewith4 digits

Field 5 (Unit price)

Pr 210/ 03 12030 Department numberwith3 digits

Field 6 (Dept. no.)

Pr 210/ 04 Check and save struc‐ture

�7

Code 128

Pr 210 10

Pr210 01

Pr210 01 1000

Pr210 02

ABCDEF 02 C 14 LI H-

Pr210 03 Pr210 03 01040

Pr210 04

Pr210 03

Pr210 03 12030

Pr210 04

l 04 C 291 L11 H-


7 - 256.111.98.5.01.13


Enter the code structure no. e.g. 10 after menuaccess

Confirm code structure no.

Confirm submenu 01

Enter barcode format, e.g. 1000

Confirm barcode format

Confirm submenu 02

Enter code constant, e.g. ABCDEF

Confirm constant

Confirm submenu 03

Enter coded value, number of digits and conversione.g. 01040 (price)

Confirm input


Select submenu 03 again

Press <3>

Confirm submenu 03

Enter coded value, number of digits and conversione.g. 12030 (department no.)

Confirm input

Confirm submenu 04

Confirm input

The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structuremust be re-entered from the beginning.

�7

Code 128

Pr21010

1

Pr210 01 10002

2 3 4 5

ABCD 02 C 16 LI H-

5

Pr210 03 01040

6 7 8

Pr210 03 06040

6 7 8


7 - 26 6.111.98.5.01.13

Example:

Create structure for barcode 128 in Pr 210The following barcode is to be printed:Text, price, PLU no., weight, unit price, department no..1 Barcode no. e.g. 10

Define barcode format Submenu 012 Barcode types

1= Code 128; 0= EAN 133 Height of barcode

00= Barcode height is taken from Pr550/02 or Pr555/07.4 OCR line

0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel

Enter text (Field 1)Submenu 02 (code constant) 5 e.g. ABCD

Price (Field 2)Submenu 03 (Numeric code) 6 Numeric code

01= price7 Number of digits for price

04= four digits for price8 Conversion of variable values

0= Decimal places as per device setting

PLU no. (Field 3)Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code

06= PLU no.7 Number of digit for PLU no.

04= four digits for PLU no.8 Conversion of variable values

0= as per device setting

�7

Code 128

Pr210 03 02040

6 7 8

Pr210 03 08040

6 7 8

Pr210 03 12030

6 7 8

Pr210 04 C 115 L19 H-


7 - 276.111.98.5.01.13

Weight (Field 4)Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code

02= Weight7 Number of digits for weight

04= four digits for weight8 Conversion of variable values


Unit price (Field 5)Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code

08= Unit price7 Number of digits for unit price

04= four digits for unit price8 Conversion of variable values


Department no. (Field 6)Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code

12= Department number7 Number of digits for department number

03= three digits for department number8 Conversion of variable values


Check and adopt codeConfirm submenu 04

confirm

�7

Code 128

Pr110 05 0 10 0000000000

12 13 15


7 - 28 6.111.98.5.01.13

Assign barcode e.g. in Pr 110/PLU no./ 0512 Code digit for barcode type

0= Instore code13 Barcode no e.g. 10

The structure of Code 128 in Pr 210 is savedunder this number.

15 Part string in example not used. Thereforethe remaining digits are without meaning.Input: ”0000000000”


1 2 3 4 5 6

Fig. 69: Example of Code 128 with 6 fields

�7

Code 128

1

2


7 - 296.111.98.5.01.13

7.9 Traceability marker Traceability textInformation about the origin of a product e.g. beef is is entered into Pr 110/PLU number (9900 to 9999)/ 10.The PLU number 9900 equals traceability number 00. PLU number 9902 equals originnumber 02 etc.

The traceability text is saved under the manufacturer number, which is printed in additionto the PLU text.1 Traceability text 2 PLU text

Fig. 70: Traceability text

Traceability no.The traceability number is allocated to a product in during the sale.There are 2 types of allocation:

1. Manual input of traceability number when a PLU is called up.2. Automatic traceability no.

Program traceability data for manual input

- Create text of origin Pr110/PLU number (9900- 9999)/ 10

- Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-1999)/ 09 -11= with data of origin

- Setting traceability marker Pr 515/03 -11= manual traceability marker,

Program traceability data for automatic traceability number

- Create text of origin Pr110/PLU number (9901-9999)/ 10

- Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-9999)/ 09 -11= with data of origin

- Setting traceability marker Pr 515/03 -22= automatic traceability marker,

- Define automatic traceability no. PR515/04 -01 (01-99)

�7


7 - 30 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.10 Overview of By Count article definition By Count articles are piece goods in a package. The number of pieces per package isdefined.

By Count and fixed weight database configuration

The By Count article type must be started up with Pr 606._______________________________________________________________________

All article data are deleted during setting databaseconfiguration.

Back up your data before database configuration.

_______________________________________________________________________

Menu setting - Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on. - Pr 606/ 08 - 81 Start database configuration

The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.

By Count piece goodsGeneral settings

Menu setting - Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.

or - Pr 515/ 07 -1 Mandatory input number of pieces for all By Count piece

goods

�7

By-Count


7 - 316.111.98.5.01.13

Create By Count piece goods in a PLU

The selling price per package refers to the unit price and the set number of pieces perpackage.

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ 07 -3 By Count piece good type - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package

The price per piece is also to be printed. If back calculation is activated, the price perpiece is determined and additionally printed.Menu setting

- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -0 Without back calculationor

- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -1 Wit back calculation The price per piece isback-calculated from the package unit price and the number of pieces.

The number of pieces must always be entered for the called By Count article in sales.Menu setting

- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of piecesor

- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -1 With mandatory input number of pieces

Overwriting the selling price must be permitted in sales.Menu setting

- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwritingor

- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -1 With price overwriting

�7

By-Count


7 - 32 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.11 Create overview of fixed weightThe stored fixed weight for the article is used for the price calculation instead of theweighed weight.

Fixed weightGeneral settings

Menu setting - Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.

or - Pr 515/ 08 -1 Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles

Define fixed weight in a PLU

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per fixed weight) - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib

or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -1 Unit price referring to 100g or 1/4 Lib

- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Type fixed weighed - Pr 110/PLU no./17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called product in sales.Menu setting

- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weightor

- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight

Overwriting the unit price should be permitted in sales.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting

or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting

�7

Fixed weight


7 - 336.111.98.5.01.13

7.12 Overview of By Count fixed weightIn the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.

By Count fixed weightGeneral settings

Menu settingMandatory input of fixed weight

- Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.or

- Pr 515/ 08 -1 Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles

Mandatory entry of quantity - Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.

or - Pr 515/ 07 -1 Piece Mandatory input for all By Count articles

Define By Count fixed weight in a PLU

Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb

or - Pr 110/ 08 -1 Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 Lib

- Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight type - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called article in sales.Menu setting

- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weightor


The number of pieces must always be entered for the called article in sales.Menu setting

- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of piecesor


Overwriting the package price must be permitted in sales.

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting

or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting

�7



7 - 34 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.13 Overview VATVAT only for ticket and multi-user operation.If you define the VAT on the scale, please proceed as follows:

1. Switch on VAT in setting into operation, see page 7 - 138.Pr606/ 07 -111 VAT onPr606/ 88 - 81 The values set are adopted.The settings paper (Pr505) and operation (Pr510) need to be re-programmed.

2. Print incl. VAT yes/no, see page 7 - 95.Pr520/ 10 -1 PrintPr520/ 10 -0 No print

3. Create VAT rates 1 to 5, see page 7 - 69.Pr230 VAT number 1-5Pr230/ 01 Define VAT ratePr230/ 02 0= VAT incl.

1= VAT excl.Pr230/ 03 VAT text

4. A VAT number for all articles yes/no, see page 7 - 71.Pr231/ 03 0= Use VAT from article

1-5 = Use a VAT for all articlesIf a VAT number (1-5) is assigned to all articles, the VAT from article is ignored.Overwriting is not possible.

5. Assign VAT to articles, see page 7 - 48.Pr110/ PLU-Nr./ 20 VAT number 1-5Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 - 1 The VAT can be overwritten.Pr215/ 09 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articlesPr215/ 10 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articlesPr215/ 11 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles

�7

VAT

Pr

Pr110 000001

Pr11020

Pr11020 1

Pr11020 2

Pr11021

Pr110 21 1


7 - 356.111.98.5.01.13

7.13.1 Assign VAT to PLU

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 VAT is activated - Pr 230 The VAT rate is created - Pr 231/ 03 -0 The VAT is used from PLU

Call up menu

Select menu

The PLU number is displayed.

confirm

Select submenu

Confirm

Enter VAT number

Confirm

The VAT rate from the VAT number 2 has now been assigned to PLU1.

Submenu 21 is displayed.

confirm

<1> press

The VAT in PLU can now be overwritten with a different VAT, see page 6 - 28.

Exit menu

�7

VAT


7 - 36 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.14 Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00)

Up to 6 devices can be connected in a scale network (system). Two scales can beconnected directly via the EDP connector. Several scales are connected with a switch.For scales with a 30 kg weighing range, please ask your Bizerba consultant.Continuous operation in system possible. With Continuous operation a ticket can betransmitted to any scale and printed in multi-operator mode. Data maintenance is alsopossible.

Process Continuous operationRegistration is done on a scale. Further registrations by the same operator can be doneon all scales within the system. With key <Total> and operator key, e. g. <OP1> the ticketcan be closed on any scale on the system. The items and the total are then printed.

The following must be observed during continuous operation:

Prerequisite - All scales must run on the same program version (Pr 716 / 09). - All scales must be equipped with a dot-seven display.

Menu setting

- The Database configuration (Pr 606) must be set equally on all scales.

- Each scale within the scale must have an own network IP address (Pr 600) - All scales need to have the same Multicast address (Pr 607/ 02). - All scales need to have the same port number

( Pr 607/ 03 ) ( Pr 607/ 04 ). - One scale must be set as master scale (Pr 607/ 01 - 9).

Only one scale must be set as master. - The other scales need to be set as slaves (Pr 607/ 01 - 1). - The operating mode must be set to multi-operator mode (510 /01 - 01).

_______________________________________________________________________

Scales in multi-operator and price labeling mode participate inmaster data supply (Pr510 01). Continuous operation cannot be runon scales in price labeling mode.

Continuous operation is only supported in operating modemulti-operator .

Master data maintenance only possible on master scale.

Sales can only be viewed, printed and deleted on the master scale.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7

0,000 0,00 0,00

1


7 - 376.111.98.5.01.13

System set-upDuring system set-up, e.g. when switching on the scales, the slave scales show thecurrent system condition as scrolling message. The scales cannot be operated during thistime.

System conditions with slave scalesIf a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrollingmessage on the display.

- ”Scale Network off”Scale not entered in system yet.

- ”Scale Update”Update of system data running.

- If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and masterdata from master scale are stored.

_______________________________________________________________________

It is absolutely necessary that you wait until all scales havebeen entered into the system.

If one of the above mentioned messages appear on the display of aslave scale and sales is continued on the other scales at the same time,synchronization of this slave scale is re-started, this means a scaleupdate is started again.This functionality may cause that the respective slave scales can nolonger be integrated in the system network.

_______________________________________________________________________

System identification

If a device has been entered into the system,the arrow 1 flashes in the display .

- Arrow flashes = Slave scale in system.

- Arrow flashes every second= master scale in system.

- Arrow is dark = stand-alone scale.

�7

0,000 0,00 0,00

1


7 - 38 6.111.98.5.01.13

Take scale out of a systemA scale in the system is to run as a single scale.

+ Press<Ctrl> and hold pressed,

then press <Up arrow>. ”WAIT” appears on the displayand the scale starts booting.

_______________________________________________________________________

Sales data and ticket memory are deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________

The scale can be operated as stand-alone scale.

If the scale is to be integrated in the system again, switch on and off scale again.The sales data and the ticket memory are cleared and overwritten with the system networkdata.

�7


7 - 396.111.98.5.01.13

7.15 PLU maintenance menu Pr 1-- Create, change or delete article (PLU).Up to 6000 articles (PLU) can be defined._______________________________________________________________________

The number of articles (PLU) depends on the settings in memorymanagement Pr 606. Standard setting is 2000 PLU.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

Define PLU Pr 110

Print article (PLU) lists Pr115

Delete article individually Pr 120

Delete article from to Pr 121

_______________________________________________________________________

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 _____9

Pr110 01


7 - 40 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.15.1 Create PLU (article) Pr 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All data related to a article is saved in the PLU no., e.g. text unit price, tare, etc. ...Select 110

Enter PLU number (1 to 6000)

Confirm

Enter submenu

Confirm

Pr 110 submenu overview:

01= Unit price02= Product group03= Tare04= Shelf-life days05= Barcode06= Price overwriting07= Article type08= Weight class09= Data of origin10= PLU article text11 = Supplementary text 1 - 412= Supplementary text 1 - 10 for BLD text fields13= Logo print in BLD logo fields 1-314= Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes15 = Unit price back calculation for the By Count operating modes16= Mandatory input of pieces17= Fixed weight18= Fixed weight mode19= Mandatory input of fixed weight20= VAT number21= VAT can be overwritten22= Tare %

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr11001 0025,80

Pr110 02 0001

Pr110 03 0,002


7 - 416.111.98.5.01.13

Unit price input _______________________________________________________________________

The price/kg depends on the unit price entry (110/�PLU no./�01) andthe set weight class (110/�PLU no./�08).

_______________________________________________________________________

Example: Weight class Unit price input Price/kg 1kg 25,80 25,80 100g 25,80 258,00

Submenu 01

Enter unit price

Save

Product group Submenu 02

Enter product group

0000-9999 Product groups are possible.

save

Tare Submenu 03

Enter tare in gram

Save

_______________________________________________________________________

Article tare is country-dependent._______________________________________________________________________

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 04 900

Pr110 05 0010815000000

1 2 3 4


7 - 42 6.111.98.5.01.13

Use-by date The sell-by date is only printed on labels.If entry smaller 900 (< 900) the text ”best before” is printed on the label.

With entry 900 the text ”Use until” instead of ”best before” is printed.E.g. for minced meat the packaged on date and the use-by date would then be the same.With an input of 901, the use-by date is 1 day later than the packaged on date, etc..The shelf life days are added to the packed dates. The resulting sell-by date is printed. If”000” is entered, no shelf-life date is printed.Submenu 04

Enter shelf-life

Shelf-life � 900 = Printing shelf-life

Shelf-life � 900 = Printing use-by date

save

Barcode for article

Prerequisitefor printing the barcode, see page 7 - 15

Submenu 05

Enter 13 digits for barcode

save

1 0= In-store code (EAN 13 or Code 128)1= Manufacturer code

2 Code structure number3 Substring (free entry) is defined in Pr 210/

034 The in-store code must be filled with

000000.

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 06 0

Pr110 07 0


7 - 436.111.98.5.01.13

Price overwriting The stored unit price for an article can be changed in sales (overwritten), see page 6 - 16.Submenu 06

Enter selection

0 = Overwriting a unit price is not permitted1= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted

Save

Article type Submenu 07

Enter article type

save

Article types0= weighed - The selling price of an article is calculated from the weight.1= non-weighed - The price does not depend on the weight. The selling price of the

article is the unit price that is entered.2= minus -The unit price of the article is a minus amount in sales e.g. for

deposit on bottles.

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 -11 By Count and fixed weight on.

or - Pr 606/ 07 -10 Only By Count valid

or - Pr 606/ 07 -01 Only fixed weight valid

- Pr 606/ 08 -81 Start Database configurationThe settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.

_______________________________________________________________________

All article data are deleted during database configuration.

Back up your data before database configuration.

_______________________________________________________________________

3= By Count - the price relates to pieces per package.4= Fixed weight5= By Count fixed weight - fixed weight and price relate to pieces per package

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 08 0

Pr110 09 0

Pr110 10 C 500 LI H-


7 - 44 6.111.98.5.01.13

Weight class _______________________________________________________________________

The price/kg depends on the unit price entry (110/�PLU no./�01) andthe set weight class (110/�PLU no./�08).

_______________________________________________________________________

Submenu 08

Enter weight class

0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb depending on country option1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb depending on country option

save

Data of origin Traceability data can be allocated to a PLU no.

Prerequisite - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 10

The data e.g. birth, slaughter, cutting, etc. has to be defined, PLU no. 9900 - 9999,see page 7 - 29.

Submenu 09

Enter selection

0= without data of origin1= with data of origin

save

PLU article text Submenu 10

Enter article text

Example:

20S

19A

27L

19A

34M

17I

Enter PLU article text, see also page7 - 9.

Start test print

”salami” is printed

save

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 11 _-_________

Pr110 11 1-000000000

Pr110 11 1-_________

Pr110 11 1-______ 101

Pr110 12 __-_________

Pr110 12 01-000000000

Pr110 12 01- 000000101


7 - 456.111.98.5.01.13

Supplementary text 1-4

PrerequisiteTicket

- Pr 550/ 13 -1 Release print of supplementary texts.

Label - Pr 555/ 16 -______1 Release print of supplementary texts.

1 to 4 supplementary texts can be printed in addition to the PLU article text.The supplementary texts have to be available in Pr 200.

Submenu 11

Enter 1,2,3 or 4

Confirm

IEnter text numberfrom Pr 200

Confirm

Supplementary text 1 - -10 for BLD text fields BLD= Bizerba Label Designer.

Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.

In the design of labels in BLD, different text fields can be defined.A text from Pr 200 can allocated to these text fields in the scales.

Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 01 -00 Label layout from BLD. - Pr 555/02 -09 Select BLD label number - Pr 606/ 03 -0 to 10 Release BLD text fields

Submenu 12

Enter text feld number

1-10

Confirm

Enter text number from Pr200

Confirm

The text no. 101 in Pr 200 is allocated to text field 1.

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 13 _-____

Pr110 13 1-____

Pr110 13 1-___ 7

Pr110 14 12


7 - 46 6.111.98.5.01.13

Logo print in BLD logo fields Graphic fields can be defined in BLD for label design.A logo can be allocated to these graphic fields in the scales.

Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 01 -00 Label layout from BLD. - Pr 555/ 02 -01.... Select BLD label. - Pr 606/ 04 -0 to 3 Release BLD logo fields

Submenu 13

Enter logo field number1-3

Confirm

Enter logo ID

Confirm

In logo field 1, the logo with ID 0007 is being printed.

By Count: Piece per package Submenu 14

Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-Nr./ 07 -3 PLU type By Count

Enter quantity

00-99 Piece per pack is possible.

Save

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 15 1

Pr110 16 0

Pr110 17 000560

Pr110 18 0


7 - 476.111.98.5.01.13

Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight Submenu 15

Enter selection

0= Without back calculation

1= with back calculationThe unit price per piece or the fixed weight per kg is calculated.

Save

By Count: Mandatory input of pieces Submenu 16

Enter selection

0 = no mandatory input

1= with mandatory input

Save

The number of pieces per pack must always be entered in the sale.

By Count: Fixed weight Submenu 17

Enter fixed weight for a package

000000 - 999999

Save

By Count: Fixed weight mode Submenu 18

Enter mode

0= Standard

1= lboz (g)

2= oz (lboz)

3= oz (g)

4= oz (lb)

save

A second representation of the unit is printed in brackets.

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 19 0

Pr110 20 1

Pr110 21 1


7 - 48 6.111.98.5.01.13

Mandatory input of fixed weight Submenu 19

Enter selection

0 = no mandatory input

1= with mandatory input

save

The fixed weight must always be entered in sales.

VAT number Submenu 20

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 VAT is activated - Pr 230 The VAT rate is created - Pr 231/ 03 -0 The VAT is used from PLU

Enter VAT number

1-5 = VAT number

save

The selling price of the selected PLU is calculated with the VAT entered.

VAT can be overwritten also see page 6 - 28Submenu 21

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 VAT is activated - Pr 230 The VAT rate is created - Pr 630 A VAT key must be created - Pr631/ 03 re-programmed keyboard is set

Enter selection

0= VAT cannot be overwritten

1= VAT can be overwritten

save

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr110 22 000,00


7 - 496.111.98.5.01.13

Tare % (dependent on country) If tare % is entered, the tare value increases in parallel to total weight in percent. If e.g. aPLU tare is entered, it is added to percent tare. The total tare is deducted from totalweight. Only the net weight is caluclated.

Example: An article has a PLU tare of 2 grams and a percent tare of 10%.

If the article has a weight of 1000 grams the 2g PLU tare + 10% percent tare arededucted. The display shows the tare weight of 102 g and the net weight of 898g.

If the same article has a weight of 1500g the display shows a tare weight of 152g and anet weight of 1348g.

Submenu 22

Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 Permit tare %

Enter the tare % of the article.

save

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr115 01

Pr115 01 000001-999999

Pr115 01 000001-______

Pr115 01

Pr115 01 000001-999999

Pr115 01 _____1-999999

Pr115 01 000001-______

Pr115 01 000001-____ 12


7 - 50 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.15.2 Print PLU (article) lists Pr115. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 4.

Print all PLUs

Select 115

Confirm

confirm

Confirm

All programmed PLUs are printed.

Print PLU selection

Submenu 01 and 02

Enter submenu

01 = Print PLU selection with all article lines02= Print PLU selection with first article line only

confirm

Enter start PLU no.

Confirm start PLU

Enter first PLU no.

Confirm the end PLU no. and start printing

PLU 1 to 12 are printed.

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr120 000015

Pr121 _____1-000000

Pr121 000001-______

Pr121 000001-____ 10


7 - 516.111.98.5.01.13

7.15.3 Delete PLU (article) individually Pr 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 120

Enter article (PLU) number

Confirm

PLU 15 is deleted.

7.15.4 Delete PLU (article) from - to Pr 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 121

Enter start PLU no.

Confirm

Enter first PLU no.

Delete

PLU 1 to 10 are deleted.

�7

PLU maintenance 1--

Pr200 _______10

Pr200 C 1500 LI H-


7 - 52 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.16 Data maintenance Menu Pr 2--Define supplementary texts and allocate to a text number.Define barcode structure.Make non-PLU settings. Non-PLU are articles that are not stored in the scales.

_______________________________________________________________________

Define supplementary texts Pr 200

Create header and footer notes text Pr 201

Create scrolling message Pr 202

Print out texts Pr 205

Delete texts Pr 206

Define barcode structure Pr 210

Create barcode structure Pr 211

Non-PLU settings Pr 215

BLD label list / print logo lisr Pr 220

Delete BLD labels / logos Pr 225

Maintain VAT Pr 230

Manage VAT Pr 231

_______________________________________________________________________

7.16.1 Define supplementary texts Pr200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

An arbitrary text is created and stored in Pr 200. Each text is given a text number. This textnumber can, for example, be allocated to a PLU product.500 text numbers may be defined.

Example:A supplementary text is saved in Pr 200 under the text number 10.In Pr 110/ PLU no./11 is where this number is entered, causing this text to be printed inaddition to the PLU article text.

Select 200

Enter text number

Confirm

Enter text

see page 7 - 9

Confirm

�7

Data maintenance 2--

Pr201 10

l C 500 LI H-


7 - 536.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.2 Create header and footer notes text Pr 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In Pr201 header and footer notes are created centrally. Each header and foot note text issaved under text number.A header or footer text is printed when one of these text numbers are entered at:- Ticket in Pr 550/ 04 and 05.

- Labels in Pr 555/09.

Select 201

Enter text number

1 - 99

Confirm

Enter header or footer text see page 7 - 9

Confirm

�7

Data maintenance Pr 2--

Pr202 10

l C 500 LI H-


7 - 54 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.3 Create text of scrolling message Pr 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 202

Enter text number

01 - 99

Confirm

Enter scrolling message text For text input, see page 7 - 9

Confirm

The output can be changed with control characters:- &Z;= Display character-by-character

- &W;= Display word-by-word (standard)

- &Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)

- &Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)

Control characters can be entered in the text at will. The control character influences thesubsequent text. Always place a < ; > after the control character.

_______________________________________________________________________

Scrolling message settings for the scale in Pr 516.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7


Pr205 01

Pr205 01 0


7 - 556.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.4 Print texts Pr205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prerequisite - Ticket paper is in the printer - Pr 505 -0 Paper type Ticket paper is set

Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 5.

Select 205

Enter submenu

01= Print supplementary texts02= Print header and footer texts03= Print scrolling message

Confirm

Starting to print

The stored texts are printed.

�7


Pr206 01

Pr206 01 ______101

Pr206 02 90

Pr206 03 _2 - 00

Pr206 03 02 - 15


7 - 56 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.5 Delete supplementary texts amd header/foot texts Pr206. . . . . . . .

Select 206

Enter submenu

01= Delete supplementary text from Pr 200 individually.02= Delete all supplementary texts from Pr 200.03= Delete single header and footer text from Pr 201.04 = Delete single scrolling message text from Pr 202.

Confirm

Delete supplementary text individuallySubmenu 01

Enter text number from Pr2001-999999999

Confirm

The text with text number 101 is deleted.

Delete all supplementary textsSubmenu 02Enter 90

Confirm

All supplementary texts in Pr 200 are deleted.

Delete header and footer textsSubmenu 03


Confirm


Confirm

Header and footer text with the text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.

�7


Pr206 04 _2 - 00

Pr206 04 02 - 15


7 - 576.111.98.5.01.13

Delete scrolling message texts Submenu 0401-99


Confirm


Confirm

Scrolling message texts with text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted. �7


Pr210 02

1

Pr206 01

Pr210 01 10002

2 3 4 5

4

3

Fig. 71: Example with OCR line


7 - 58 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.6 Define barcode structure Pr 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In Pr 210 the structure of the instore code EAN 13 and the code structure for code 128 iscreated.

_______________________________________________________________________

Examples for- Barcode structure code 128 see pge 7 - 23- Barcode structure instore code EAN 13 see pge 7 - 18.

_______________________________________________________________________

Structure for Code 128 and EAN 13Select210

Submenu01= Define barcode format02= Enter code constant03= Select numeric code04= Check code structure and save

Enter structure number

01 - 99 1 Structure number e.g. 02

Confirm structure number

Confirm submenu

Create barcode format Submenu 012 Barcode types

0= EAN131= Code 128

3 Height of barcode00= Barcode height is taken fromPR550/02 or Pr555/07.05 to 22 = Barcode height in mm

4 OCR line 0= OCR line is printed1= OCR line is not printed

5 Module width 2 or 3 Pixel

Confirm

�7


l 02 C 20 LI H-

Pr210 03 01050

1 2 3


7 - 596.111.98.5.01.13

Enter code constant Submenu 02

Confirm

Text and numeric input of up to 20 characters is possible for Code 128.Text input see page 7 - 9For EAN 13, only numbers with up to 12 digits are possible.

Confirm

Select numeric code Submenu 03

Confirm

1 Encoded values01= price02= Weight03= No. of pcs.04= Foreign currency05= Part string from PLU Starts after 4. digit after the code structure number06=PLU number07= Middle check digit Input 07000

Only for EAN 13. middle check digit possible on pos. 6,7 or 8.

08= Unit price09= Foreign currency unit price10= Tare11= Device number, see Pr 60512= Department number, see Pr 60413= Operator no.14= Scale number, see Pr 60315= 313 Modulo 10 check digit for code 12816= 131 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128

2 Number of digits01 to 10 digits

�7



7 - 60 6.111.98.5.01.13

3 Conversion of variable values0= Decimal places as per device setting1= Decimal places are cut off No rounding occurs.2= There is a cutoff after the first decimal place. No rounding.3= After the second decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.4= After the third decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.5= Floating comma only for EAN 13.

The code digit (e.g. 22 for price) is increased by the number of omitted digits. Theincreased code digit means that during scanning of the barcode the number ofdigits and position of the comma are established.

6= The value to be coded is multiplied by 107= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 10.8= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 100.9= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 1000.

Brief example: Define code structure for Code EAN 13 (12digits required)Pr 210 05 Create structure number e.g. 05Pr 210/ 01 00002 (EAN 13 with OCR)Pr 210/ 02 21 Constant e.g. 21 (2 digits)

Pr 210/ 03 06040 PLU number (4 digits)Pr 210/ 03 07000 Middle check digit (1 digit)Pr 210/ 03 02050 Weight with (5 digits)

Pr 210/ 04 <enter> Check and save structure

1 Constant 2 digits2 PLU number 4-digits3 Middle check digit 1 digit4 Weight 5 digits5 Automatic check digit of the scale

Fig. 72: Example of barcode

�7


1 2 3 4 5

Pr210 04 C 337 LI H-

Decimals as configured 04 C 337 L8 H-


7 - 616.111.98.5.01.13

Check and adopt code structure Submenu 04

Confirm

Check code structure by printing out

+ <Press> shift and hold,

then<press> total.The entered code is printed.

Fig. 73: Print code structure

Check code structure in display

<Press scrolling.

The entered code is displayed line by line

confirm

The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The codestructure must be re-entered from the beginning.

�7


Pr211 01

Pr211 01 0

123456

7 8 9

Pr211 02 _1-00

Pr211 02 01- 10


7 - 62 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.7 Administer barcode structure Pr 211. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 211

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Print code structures

02= Delete code structures

03= Code structure number for all PLU

04= Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position

05= Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position

Print code structures Submenu 01

Confirm

The saved barcode structures are printed

1 Structure number 2 Barcode format3 Field 1 code constant

4 Content field 15 Field 2 part string from PLU6 No. of digits for field 27 Field 3 price8 No. of digits for field 39 Conversion of variable values

Fig. 74: Barcode structures

Delete code structures Submenu 02

Enter first code number e.g. 1

confirm

Enter code number., e.g. 10.

confirm

Code numbers 1 to 10 are deleted.

�7


Pr211 03 11

Pr211 04 0

Pr211 05 0


7 - 636.111.98.5.01.13

Code structure number for all PLUs Submenu 03The same barcode structure is assigned to all PLUs.

Enter code number

00= Take code structure number from PLUPr 110/ 05

01-99 = Code structure number is used for allPLUs.

Confirm

All articles (PLU) are printed out with barcode structure no. 11.The barcode structure is set in Pr 210.

Module widthBars and spaces of a barcode have a standard pixel width. The readability of a rotatedprinted barcode can be improved by using a larger pixel width.

Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position Submenu 04Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position .

Enter module width

0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).2, 3= Use module width generally. Ignore module width from code structure.

Confirm

Module width for barcode in 90º and 270º position Submenu 05Module width for barcode in 90º and 270º position .

Enter module width

0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).2, 3= Use module width generally. Ignore module width from code structure.

Confirm

�7


Pr215 01

Pr215 01 190508


7 - 64 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.8 Non-PLU settings Pr215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 215

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

02= Barcode for non-PLU weighed articles

03= Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)

04= Barcode for non-PLU minus article

05= Barcode for total

06= Product group for non-PLU weighed

07= Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)

08= Barcode for non-PLU minus article

09= VAT for non-PLU weighed

10= VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods)

11= VAT for non-PLU minus article

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) Submenu 01

Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 05 -01 or 11 Release print of sell-by date on label

_______________________________________________________________________

Date representation depends on the setting in Pr 500/04._______________________________________________________________________

Enter date

e.g. 26.04.2007If 000000 is entered, no date is printed.

Save

�7


Pr215 02 0000000000000

Pr215 03 0000000000000

Pr215 04 0000000000000

Pr215 05 0020000000000

1 2 3 4


7 - 656.111.98.5.01.13

PrerequisiteFor ticket

- Pr 550/ 01 Release print of barcodeFor labels

- Pr 555/ 06 Release print of barcode

Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles Submenu 02Enter 13 digits for the barcode

Save

Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) Submenu 03

Enter 13 digits for the barcode

Save

Barcode for non-PLU minus article Submenu 04


Save

Barcode for total Submenu 05


Save

1 0= In-store code (EAN 13 or Code 128)1= manufacturer code

2 Code structure number3 Substring (free input)

The number of digits is dependent on the number of digits for the substring. Thenumber is defined in Pr 210/ 03.

4 The in-store code must be filled with 000000.

�7


Pr215 06 0000

Pr215 07 0000

Pr215 08 0000


7 - 66 6.111.98.5.01.13

Product groups for non-PLU weighed articles Submenu 06

Enter product group


Save

Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) Submenu 07

Enter product group


Save

Product groups for non-PLU minus articles Submenu 08

Enter product group


Save

�7


Pr215 09 1

Pr215 10 1

Pr215 11 1


7 - 676.111.98.5.01.13

VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles Submenu 09

Enter VAT number

1 - 5 VAT numbers are possible

Save

VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) Submenu 10

Enter VAT number


Save

VAT for Non-PLU minus articles Submenu 11

Enter VAT number


Save

�7


Pr220 01

Pr220 01 0

Pr220 02 0

Pr225 01


7 - 68 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.9 BLD label list / print logo list Pr220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 220

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Print BLD label list02= Print logo list

Print BLD label list Submenu 01

Confirm

The list of BLD labels stored in the scales is printed.

Print logo list Submenu 02

Confirm

The list of BLD logos stored in the scales is printed.

7.16.10 Delete BLD labels / logos Pr 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 225

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Delete BLD labels02= Delete BLD logos

�7


Pr225 01 01-00

Pr225 01 01- 03

Pr225 02 0001-0000

Pr225 02 0001- 0003

Pr230 1

Pr230 01


7 - 696.111.98.5.01.13

Delete BLD labels Submenu 01

Enter BLD label no.

Confirm

Enter BLD label no.

Confirm

The selected labels are deleted.

Delete BLD logos Submenu 02

Enter BLD logo ID

Confirm

Enter BLD logo ID

Confirm

The selected BLD logos are deleted.Example, see page 7 - 7

7.16.11 Define VAT Pr 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 230

Enter VAT number 1 - 5

Confirm

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Define VAT rate

02= Incl. or excl. VAT

03= VAT text

�7


Pr230 01 19,00

Pr230 02 0

Incl. 19% 03 C20 LI H-

230 2

Pr230 01


7 - 70 6.111.98.5.01.13

Define VAT rate also see page 7 - 34Submenu 01

Enter tax rate in %, e.g. 19%0-99

Confirm

Incl. or excl. VAT Submenu 02

Incl. or excl. VAT0= Incl. VAT1= Excl. VAT

Confirm

VAT text Submenu 03

Enter text

Confirm

A VAT rate is created. Up to 5 different VAT rates can be created.

Esc Press<ESC>

The next VAT number is displayed.

Confirm

The next VAT rate (no.2) can be defined.

�7


Pr231 01

Pr231 01 0

Pr231 02 1 - 0

Pr231 02 1 - 3

Pr231 03 2


7 - 716.111.98.5.01.13

7.16.12 Manage VAT Pr 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 231

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Printing list with VAT data record

02= Deleting VAT number

03= General VAT

Printing VAT list Submenu 01

Confirm

List with defined VAT rates is printed.

Deleting VAT number Submenu 02

Enter VAT number1 to 5

Confirm

Enter VAT number 1 to 5

Confirm

The data records of VAT numbers 1,2 and 3 are deleted.

Same VAT for all articles Submenu 03Enter VAT number

0= Use VAT from PLU and Non-PLU1 - 5= Use same VAT for all articles

Confirm

�7


Pr 300 01

Pr 300 01 0


7 - 72 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.17 Reports menu Pr 3--

_______________________________________________________________________

Configure report layout Pr 300

Print reports on ticket Pr 310

Print report on label Pr 311

Display / delete sales Pr 320

_______________________________________________________________________

7.17.1 Configure report layout Pr 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 300Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Printing prices

02= Printing PLU without sales

03= Printing customer title for PLU report (Pr 310/ 02 and 03)

04= Printing customer title for product groups report (Pr310/ 04)

05= Printing customer title for operator report (Pr310/ 05)

06= Printing customer titles for scales overall sales (Pr311/ 01) and overall sales operatorreport (Pr310/ 05)

07= Printing customer title for origin data report (Pr 310/ 06 and 07)

08= Printing customer title for VAT report (Pr310/ 08)

Printing pricesSubmenu 01

Enter selection

0= Prices are not printed1= Prices are printed

Confirm

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr 300 02 0

Pr 300 03 01


7 - 736.111.98.5.01.13

Printing PLU without salesSubmenu 02

Enter selection

0= PLUs without sales are not printed1= PLUs without sales are printed

Confirm

Customer title for reportsSubmenu 03 to 08New report title (customer title) are created in Pr 201.

Assign text number of a title to report, e.g. 03.

Enter text number

01-99 Text number from Pr 201.

00 Print Standard title..

Confirm

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr 310 01

Pr 310 01 0


7 - 74 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.17.2 Print reports on ticket Pr310. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The reports can either be printed or printed and deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________

Please note configuration of report layout Pr 300, see page 7 - 72. _______________________________________________________________________


Confirm

Submenu overview:

01= Scale report

02= PLU report with an article text line

03= PLU report with an article text lines

04= Product groups report

05= Operator report

06= Data of origin - sales report with one traceability text line

07= Data of origin - sales report with all traceability text lines

08= VAT sales report

Scale report Submenu 01

Enter selection

0= Print or delete reports1= Print or delete report

Starting to print

Reports on PLU, operators, product groups and traceability data are printed.

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr310 02 0

Pr310 03 0

12

7

456

8

*

3


7 - 756.111.98.5.01.13

PLU report with one product text line Submenu 02

Enter selection


Starting to print

PLU report with one article text line is printed.

PLU report with all article text lines Submenu 03

Enter selection


Starting to print

The PLU report is printed with all article text lines.

1 Unit price 2 Sales volume of this PLU3 Overwrite PLU unit price.4 Number of registration5 Sold quantity6 Product group7 PLU article number8 PLU text

Fig. 75: PLU article report

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr310 04 0

13

4

2


7 - 76 6.111.98.5.01.13

Product group report Submenu 04

Starting to print

The product group report is printed.

1 Sales for this product group 2 Number of recordings3 Sold quantity4 Product group number

Fig. 76: Product group report

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr310 05 0

12

3

Pr310 06 0


7 - 776.111.98.5.01.13

Operator report Submenu 05

Enter selection


Starting to print

The operator report is being printed.

1 Sales of operator 1 2 Number of sales deletions3 Operator no.

The operator report documents 2 how oftenscale sales have been deleted before thecurrent report.

Fig. 77: Operator report

Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line Submenu 06

Enter selection


Starting to print

The report on traceability data sales is printed with one traceability text line.

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr310 07 0

1

23

4


7 - 78 6.111.98.5.01.13

Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines Submenu 07

Enter selection


Starting to print

The report on traceability data sales is printed with all traceability text lines.

In the traceability data sales report, the traceability data is printed with the number of solditems and sold weight.1 Number of sold items 2 sold weight3 Traceability text4 Traceability no.

Fig. 78: Traceability data sales report

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr310 08 0

1

2

3

4

5

Fig.: 79: VAT sales report

Pr3110

1

23


7 - 796.111.98.5.01.13

VAT sales report Submenu 08

Enter selection


Starting to print

The VAT sales report is printed.1 Incl. VAT 2 Excl. VAT3 VAT text4 VAT rate5 VAT number

7.17.3 Print report on label Pr311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 311

Starting to print

The scale's total sales are printed.

1 Scale number 2 Total sales of scale3 Number of sales deletions

Fig. 80: Total sales report

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr320 01

Pr320 01 364,15

Pr320 02 90


7 - 80 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.17.4 Display / delete sales Pr320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


01= Display overall sales of scales02= Delete sales

Confirm

Display sales Submenu 01

Confirm

The scale's total sales are displayed.

Delete sales Submenu 02_______________________________________________________________________

The overall sales of scales is completely deleted!

_______________________________________________________________________

Enter 90

Confirm

The total salesof the scales is deleted.The deletion is being booked, see page 7 - 79.

�7

Reports Pr 3--

Pr500 01


7 - 816.111.98.5.01.13

7.18 Device Configuration Menu Pr 5--

_______________________________________________________________________

Setting date and time Pr 500

Select type of paper Pr 505

Setting main operating mode Pr 510

Setting switching operating mode Pr 510

Settings for different operating modes Pr 515

Scrolling message settings Pr 516

Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 520

Settings for quick-operator mode Pr 521

Settings for price labeling mode Pr 525

Configure operator keys with operator no. Pr 530

PLU input mode and range limitation Pr 535

Print out PLU direct keys Pr 536

Tare fixed value memory Pr 540

Rounding and price calculating settings Pr 545

Create ticket and release printout of barcode Pr 550

Create labels and release printout of barcode Pr 555

Labels configuration management Pr 556

Foreign currency settings Pr 560

_______________________________________________________________________

7.18.1 Setting date and time Pr500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 500

Enter submenu

Article

Submenu overview:

01= Setting date

02= Setting time

03= Print year number either 2 or 4-digit

04= Date presentation

�7

Device Configuration Pr 5--

Pr500 01 190508

Pr500 02 0908

Pr500 03 0


7 - 82 6.111.98.5.01.13

Setting date Submenu 01

Enter date Input DDMMYYThe sequence is dependent on the setting in submenu 04

Save

Setting time Submenu 02

Enter time Input hhmm

Save

Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits Submenu 03

Enter selection

0= Year with 2 digits1= Year with 4 digits

Save

�7


Pr500 04 00


7 - 836.111.98.5.01.13

Date representation Submenu 04

Enter selection

Save

Input inPr 500/ 01

PrintExample

00 Day-Month-Y ear numeric DDMMYY 21.07.06

01 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMMYY 21July 06

02 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMM 21July

03 Month-Year alphanumeric MMYYDD July 06

04 Month-Day-Y ear American numeric MMDDYY 07.21.06

05 Month-Day-Y ear American alphanumeric MMDDYY July 21.06

06 Year-Month-Day Hungarian numeric YYMMDD 06.07.21

07 Year-Month-Day Hungarian alphanumeric YYMMDD 06July 21

08 Day-Month-Y ear numeric DDMMYY 21-07-06

09 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMMYY 21-July-06

�7


Pr505 0

Pr510 01


7 - 84 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.2 Select type of paper Pr 505. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 505

Enter selection

0= Ticket paper1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer)

Confirm

7.18.3 Setting main operating mode Pr510

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination <Shift>+ <ESC>.

Select 510

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:

01 = Select main operating type02= Select layout03= Addition of customer total

�7


Pr510 01 01

Pr510 02 0

Pr510 03 0


7 - 856.111.98.5.01.13

Select main operating mode Submenu 01

Enter selection

Save

01= Multi-operator mode02= Self-service mode03= Quick-service mode04= Price labeling with manual triggering05= Price labeling with automatic start

Select layout Submenu 02

Enter selection

0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)1= Label layout

Save

Addition of customer total Only effective on labels.

Example: A customer buys several articles. One label is created per article Afterwards atotal label is createdThe total is printed if ”with addition” has been set.

Submenu 03

Enter selection

0= without addition of customer total.1= with addition of customer total.

Save

�7


Pr511 01

Pr511 01 02

Pr511 02 1


7 - 86 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.4 Setting switching operating mode Pr511. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination <Shift>+ <ESC>.

Select 511

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Select switching operating mode02= Select layout03= Addition of customer total

Select switching operating mode Submenu 01

Enter selection

Save

01= Multi-operator mode02= Self-service mode03= Quick-service mode04= Price labeling with manual triggering05= Price labeling with automatic start

Select layout Only effective for operating modes that allow ticket and labellayout e.g. multi-operator mode.

Submenu 02

Enter selection

0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)1= Label layout

Save

�7


Pr511 03 0

Pr515 01

Pr515 01 0


7 - 876.111.98.5.01.13

Addition of customer total Only effective on labels.

Submenu 03

Enter selection

0= without addition of customer total.1= with addition of customer total.

Save

7.18.5 Settings for different operating modes Pr515. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 515

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Automatic zerosetting.02= Open tickets / labels03= Traceability marker04= Automatic traceability number.05= Negative customer total permitted or not permitted.06= Determination of sales.07=Complusory entry for By Count piece08= Complusory entry for fixed weight

Automatic zerosetting Submenu 01

Enter selection

0= Scale is reset (within the limits for automatic zerosetting).1= Zerosetting error 115 is displayed, when the weight value is below zero.2= Scale is not set to zero.

Save

�7


Pr515 02 0

Pr515 03 0

Pr515 04 35

Pr515 05 1


7 - 88 6.111.98.5.01.13

Open tickets / labels Submenu 02

Enter selection

0 = open tickets are printed.After switching on the scales, open tickets are automatically printed.

1= open tickets are not printed and not deleted.If open tickets exist after the scales have been switched on, they have to be finalized(<Total> <OP>).

Save

Traceability marker also see page 7 - 29Submenu 03

Enter selection

0= Traceability marker is off.1= Enter traceability no. manually.2 =Use defined traceability no.

Save

Define traceability number Submenu 04

Enter selection

00-99 = defined traceability no.

Save

All articlse (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the textthat is stored under the defined traceability number.

Negative customer total Submenu 05

Enter selection

0= Customer total cannot become negative.1= Customer total can become negative.

Save

�7


Pr515 06 1

Pr515 07 1

Pr515 08 1


7 - 896.111.98.5.01.13

Sales calculation To create the reports ( Pr310 and Pr 311), the sold items have to be added in the totalmemory.

Submenu 06

Enter selection

0= Sold items are not added to the total memories.1 = Sold items are added to the total memories.

Save

Compulsory entry for By Count pieces Submenu 07

Enter selection

0 = Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/161= Compulsory entry for By Count piece

Save

Compulsory entry for fixed weight Submenu 08

Enter selection

0 = Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/191= Compulsory entry for fixed weight and By Count fixed weight

Save

�7


Pr516 01

Pr516 01 00

Pr516 02 0

Pr516 03 0


7 - 90 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.6 Scrolling message settings Pr 516. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 516

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01 = Select scrolling message no. from Pr 20202= Select display location03= Activate scrolling message04 = Test scrolling message

Select scrolling message no. Submenu 01

Enter selection

00= Scrolling message not active00-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202

Save

Select display location Submenu 02

Enter selection

0 = Scrolling message on customer side1 = Scrolling message on operator side2 = Scrolling message on both sides

Save

Activate scrolling message Submenu 03

Enter selection

0 = Scrolling message starts even with open operator accounts.1 = Scrolling message only starts when the scale is not being operated.

Save

�7


Pr516 04 1

&Zscrolling message 04 - - - - -

Pr520 01

Pr520 01 0


7 - 916.111.98.5.01.13

Test scrolling message Submenu 04

Confirm

The scrolling message is displayed withcontrol characters

7.18.7 Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 520. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_______________________________________________________________________

To ensure that the settings in Pr 520, it is absolutely necessary to setthe operating mode multi-operator mode.

Pr 510/ 01 -01Multi-operator mode_______________________________________________________________________Select 520

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Constant key function02= Print article and total label03= Items Operator Display Mode04= Cash register functions05= Payment in/out06= Talon print-out07= Repeat ticket08= Open ticket again09= Print cancellation and canceled articles10= Printing included VAT11= Print ticket as requested

Constant key function Submenu 01

Enter selection

0= Fix unit price1= Fix tare value2= Fix unit price and tare value

Save

�7


Pr520 02 0


7 - 92 6.111.98.5.01.13

Print article and total label

Prerequisite - Pr510/02 -1 Label layout is set

or - Pr 511/02 -1 Label layout is set

Submenu 02

Enter selection

0= Print article and total label1= Only print total label2 = Only print article label

Save

0= Print article and total labelThe article label is printed when an article is registered.The total label is printed if the <Total> and e.g. <OP1> keys are pressed.

1= Only print total labelThe article is registered but not printed when an operator key, e.g. <OP1> is pressed.The total label is printed if the <Total> and e.g. <OP1> keys are pressed.

2 = Only print article labelThe article label is printed when an article is registered.The total is displayed if the <Total> and e.g. <OP1> keys are pressed.

_______________________________________________________________________

The number of items is printed on the total label.

The customer total (€) is only printed, if addition of customer total is set in Pr510/03 -1 or Pr511/03 -1

_______________________________________________________________________

�7


Pr520 03 001

1 2 3

Total OP 1 Po 2 2,54* [1]

Pr520 04 0


7 - 936.111.98.5.01.13

Operator items display Submenu 03

Enter selection 1 Display for sheet cancellation2 Display after recording3 Display for total/subtotal

0= inactive1 = active

Save

Example: The operator number ”OP 1” and thenumber of registered items ”Po 2”appear in the display.

Cash functions Submenu 04

Enter selection

0= Check-out draw does not open; registration is always permitted

1= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total> and<operator>.You can register when the check-out drawer is open.

2= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total>and<operator>.You can register when the check-out drawer is open.

3= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total> and<operator>.You cannot register when the check-out drawer is open.

4= Cash register opens after pressing keys <Total>and<operator>.You cannot register when the check-out drawer is open.

Save

�7


Pr520 05 0

Pr520 06 00

Pr520 07 0

Pr520 08 0


7 - 94 6.111.98.5.01.13

Payment in/out

Prerequisite - Pr 550/ 12- 1 Printout payment in/out

Submenu 05

Enter selection

0= without payment in/out1= Payment in/out with a currency2= Combined payment in/out in local currency and foreign currency *

Save

Talon print-out also see page 6 - 25

Submenu 06

Enter selection

00= without talon01-99 = with talon, the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds.

Save

Repeat ticket The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.also see page 6 - 26

Submenu 07

Enter selection 0= without repeat ticket1 = with repeat ticket

Save

Open ticket again also see page 6 - 26Submenu 08

Enter selection 0= without ticket reopening1 = with ticket repening

Save

�7


Pr520 09 0

Pr520 10 0

Pr520 11 0


7 - 956.111.98.5.01.13

Print cancellation and canceled articles also see page 6 - 26Submenu 09

Enter selection 0 = without printing of cancellation and canceled articles1 = with printing of cancellation and canceled articles

Save

Printing included VAT also see page 7 - 34Submenu 10

Enter selection 0= no printing included VAT1= Printing included VAT

Save

Print ticket if requested also see page 6 - 25Submenu 11

Enter selection 0= Print ticket as requested (<Shift> +<OP>)1= Print ticket always

Save

_______________________________________________________________________

Customer ticket can be switched off

The scale offers the option of suppressing printout of the customerticket.According to EC regulation 90/384/EEC for ”non-automatic scales”,the customer is entitled to a receipt in order to check the salestransactions in accordance with Appendix 1, No.14.Suppression of the customer ticket should therefore only be activatedif you are sure that there is no customer requirement for printout of acustomer ticket.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7


Pr521 1


7 - 96 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.8 Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 521

Description, see page 6 - 4_______________________________________________________________________


Pr 510/ 01 -03 Quick-service mode_______________________________________________________________________Select 521

Enter selection

0= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration with the Operator key.1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration is automatic.

Confirm

�7


Pr525 01

Pr525 01 0


7 - 976.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.9 Settings for price labeling mode * Pr525. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

_______________________________________________________________________


Pr 510/ 01 -04Price labeling with release by hand

or

Pr 510/ 01 -05Price labeling with automatic start_______________________________________________________________________

Select 525

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Labeling mode02= Piece price multi- label printing

Labeling mode Submenu 01

Enter selection

0= Price labelingLabel printing with sales price ”0.00” is not supported.Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.Batch total label with number of items and batch price.

1= Weight labelingLabel printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported.Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *

2 = Weight labeling onlyLabel printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported.If only the weight should be printed on the label, the unit price has to be ”0.00”.Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *

Save

�7


Pr525 02 00


7 - 98 6.111.98.5.01.13

Piece price multiple label printing Submenu 02

Enter selection

00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay.01 - 99 = Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay.

Save

�7


Pr530 __ - ___

Pr530 02 - 002

Pr530

02 - 020

Pr535 01

Pr535 01 0


7 - 996.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.10 Configure operator keys with operator no. Pr530. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 530

Enter key number (1-16)

Confirm

Enter operator number (1-999)

Save

7.18.11 PLU input mode and range limitation Pr535. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 535

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input02= PLU input: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.03= PLU-direct key mode04= PLU-direct key allocation05= PLU-range limitation06 = Delay time for PLU no. input

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input Submenu 01

Enter selection

0 = Entering the unit price via ten-key keypad. Switch to PLU no. input by pressing the <Switch> key.

1 = PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad. Switch to unit price input by pressing the <Switch> key.

2 = It is only possible to enter the PLU no. with the ten-key keypad and not the unit price.

Confirm

�7


Pr535 02 6

Pr535 03 0

Pr535 04 019 - 000019

Pr535 04 019 - 000001


7 - 100 6.111.98.5.01.13

PLU entry: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. Submenu 02

Enter selection

2= PLU no. input with 2 digits3= PLU no. input with 3 digits4= PLU no. input with 4 digits5= PLU no. input with 5 digits6= PLU no. input with 6 digits

Confirm

PLU direct key mode Submenu 03

Enter selection

0= No range limitation: The PLU direct key no. corresponds to the PLU article number. With range limit: The PLU direct key no. calls the PLU article number

allocated by the limit, see submenu 05.1= PLU-direct keyboard is locked.

PLU call-up is only possible with the ten-key keypad.2= The PLU direct key no. calls the individually allocated PLU article numbers,

see submenu 04.The range limit only applies for PLU no. call-up via the ten-key keypad.

Confirm

PLU direct key allocation

Prerequisite - Pr 535/ 03 -2 PLU article no. is taken from the PLU direct key allocation.

An article (PLU no.) can be allocated to any PLU direct key.

Submenu 04

Enter PLU direct key no. (001-246)

Confirm

Enter PLU article number (0-999999)

Confirm

The allocated PLU article number is called up with the PLU direct key.

�7


Pr535 05 ___101 - 999999

Pr535 05 000101 - ___200


7 - 1016.111.98.5.01.13

PLU range limitation _______________________________________________________________________ The PLU range limit does not affect the PLU direct keys where the

setting is Pr 535/03-2.

_______________________________________________________________________If only some of the articless stored on the scales are required, the articless on this set ofscales can be limited.

Example:There are 2000 articless stored on the scales.Fruit articles from PLU 1 to PLU 100.Cheese articles from PLU 101 to PLU 200.Sausage articles from PLU 201 to PLU 800 etc.

Only cheese is supposed to be sold on the cheese scales.The articless in the cheese scales are limited to articless 101 to 200.This means the smallest range article number is allocated to PLU 1.

Submenu 05

Enter the smallest PLU article no. in the range

Confirm

Enter the largest PLU article number in therange

Confirm

Article 101 is called up with PLU no. 1, and article 200 with PLU no. 100.Calls outside of the range are rejected.

W/o range limitation With range limitationArticle number = PLU-No

PLU

PLUCalling PLUs Calling PLUs

Fig.: 81: PLU range limitation

�7


Pr535 06 10


7 - 102 6.111.98.5.01.13

Delay time PLU no. input If e.g. a 6-digit PLU no. input is expected, and only a 2-digit no. is input, the PLU is calledafter the set delay time.

Submenu 06

Input time delay e. �g.�10

00= The desired PLU is called up with <Enter> or after entering all digits.

00-20 =The desired PLU is called after the set delay time.

Confirm

The delay time value (01-20) is not specified in seconds.1= small delay time;20= large delay time.

�7


Pr536 0

12


7 - 1036.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.12 Print out PLU direct keys Pr536. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the allocation of articles (PLU number) to the PLU direct keys.

Select 536

Start printing

The PLU direct key list is printed.

Esc Cancel print job.

1 PLU number 2 PLU direct key

Fig. 82: PLU direct keys

�7


Pr540 _ - ____

Pr540 1 - 0000

Pr540 1 - 0002

Pr545 01


7 - 104 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.18.13 Tare fixed value memory Pr540. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 540

Enter the tare direct key (1-4)

Confirm

Input assigned tare value

Confirm

7.18.14 Rounding and price calculation settings for national currency Pr545. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Customer total and article total can be rounded off to the last 2 digits.

If a related text is required, this can be released for printing in Pr 550/07. The text has tobe defined in Pr 200.

_______________________________________________________________________

Rounding and price calculation settings are specific to country.

_______________________________________________________________________

Select 545

Input submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Rounding of customer total02= Rounding of article total03= Rounding for By Count

�7


Pr545 01 0

Pr545 02 0


7 - 1056.111.98.5.01.13

Rounding methods for customer total * Submenu 01

Enter selection

Confirm

0= no rounding1= rounding to 52 = rounding to 103= rounding to 504= rounding to 1005 = mathematical rounding to 5*6= mathematical rounding to 10*7= mathematical rounding to 25*8= mathematical rounding to 50*9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

Rounding of article total * Submenu 02

Enter selection

Confirm


Examples of rounding, see page 7 - 106.

�7


Pr545 03 0


7 - 106 6.111.98.5.01.13

Examples of rounding

Setting Explanation Example

0 No rounding 10.43 � 10.43

1Rounding to 5The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”.

10.42 � 10.40

10.48 � 10.45

2Rounding to 10The last digit is always ”0”:

10.42 � 10.40

10.48 � 10.40

3Rounding to 50The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”.

10.34 � 10.00

10.83 � 10.50

4Rounding to 100The last digits are always ”00”.

10.43 � 10.00

10.76 � 10.00

5Mathematical rounding to 5The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”.

10.42 � 10.40

10.43 � 10.45

10.48 � 10.50

6mathematical rounding to 10The last digit is always ”0”:

10.42 � 10.40

10.48 � 10.50

7

mathematical rounding to 25The last digits are always ”00”, 25”,”50” or ”75”.

10.12 � 10.00

10.23 � 10.25

10.45 � 10.50

10.66 � 10.7510.88 � 11.00

8mathematical rounding to 50The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”.

10.21 � 10.00

10.34 � 10.50

10.83 � 11.00

9Mathematical rounding to 100The last digits are always ”00”.

10.43 � 10.00

10.78 � 11.00

Rounding for By Count Submenu 03

Enter selection 0 = mathematical1 = round up next position

Save

�7



7 - 1076.111.98.5.01.13

7.19 Ticket design overview Information can be added, disabled or modified on the ticket.

1 Scale numberEnter Pr 603 scale number

2 Ticket counterPr 550/10 - 1Ticket counter print

3 Operator number4 Unit price

Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 unit price5 Selling price6 Tare

Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 PLU tarePr 550/ 03 Tare print-out

7 Non-weighed, key <Non-weighed>8 Minus inpit, key <Minus input>9 Ticket total

10 Footer line zexzPr 201 Enter footer textPr 550/ 05 Footer text print-out

11 Barcode see page 7 - 15.Pr 215/ 05 Totals barcodePr215/ 04 Barcode for non-PLU minusPr 110/ PLU number/ 05 PLU barcodePr 210/ Barcode structure for in-store codePr 550/ 01 Barcode print-outPr 550/ 02 Barcode height

Fig. 83: Ticket example12 Item counter13 PLU article text

Pr 110/PLU no./10 Enter PLU article textPr 550/ 8 Select font typePr 550/ 9 Number of article text lines to be printed

14 TimePr 500/ 02

15 DatePr 500/ 01 Enter datePr 500/ 03 Year number either 2- or 4-digitPr 500/ 04 Select date format

16 Department numberPr 604 Enter number

17 Header textPr 201 Create header textPr 550 / 04 Print-out of header text

�7


11

13

12

14

15

16

17

1

10

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Pr550 01

Pr550 01 000

1 2 3

Pr550 02 17


7 - 108 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.19.1 Create ticket Pr 550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 550

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Print barcode on ticket02= Barcode height in mm on ticket03= Print tare on ticket04= Print header text05= Print footer text06= Print foreign currency supplementary text07= Print rounding supplementary text08= Font change on ticket09= Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket10= Ticket counter printout11= Print foreign currency *12 = Print amount paid in/out13= Print supplementary texts14 = Print header logo15= Printout footer logo

Print barcode on ticket Submenu 01

Enter selection 1 Article barcode2 Totals Barcode3 Talon barcode

0= Do not print barcode on ticket1= Print barcode

Save

Barcode height in mm on ticket Submenu 02

Enter selection 5-22 mm

Confirm

�7


Pr550 03 0

Pr550 04 01

Pr550 05 02


7 - 1096.111.98.5.01.13

Print tare on ticket Submenu 03

Enter selection

0= Do not print tare value on ticket1 = Print tare value, net weight is marked.

(country-specific character) Germany = N.2 = Print tare value, net weight is not marked.

Confirm

Print header text

PrerequisiteThe header text has to be defined in Pr 201.

RequirementsThe header text has to be defined in Pr 201.

Submenu 04

Enter selection

00= no printout of header text01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 53.

Confirm

Print footer text

PrerequisiteThe footer text has to be defined in Pr 201.

Submenu 05

Enter selection

00= no printout of footer text01-99 = Footer text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 53.

Confirm

�7


Pr550 06 000000000

Pr550 07 000000000


7 - 110 6.111.98.5.01.13

Print foreign currency supplementary text Submenu 06

Enter selection

000000000= No foreign currency supplement. text1-999999999= Foreign currency supplement. text number see Pr 200

Confirm

Print rounding supplementary text _______________________________________________________________________

The rounding supplementary text is only printed if rounding has takenplace.

_______________________________________________________________________

Submenu 07

Enter selection

000000000= without rounding suppl. text1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number, see Pr 200

Confirm

1 Total2 rounded total3 Rounding text

Fig. 84: Example of rounding text

�7


1

2

3

Pr550 08 000

Pr550 09 0

Pr550 10 1


7 - 1116.111.98.5.01.13

Font change on ticket Each article text was created with selected font. This PLU font is used for printing. (Text inPr 110/ PLU no./ 10).A fixed and pre-set font can be defined for all print-outs. This font has priority over thePLU font.

Submenu 08

Enter selection

000= Font from PLU001-1 10= fixed font. The font set in the PLU is ignored.

Confirm

Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket Submenu 09

Enter selection

0= all text lines are printed1-9 = the corresponding number of lines are printed10 = text lines not printed

Confirm

Ticket counter printout Submenu 10

Enter selection

0= Counter is not printed1= Counter is printed

Confirm

�7


Pr550 11 0000

1 2 3 4

Pr550 12 0

Pr550 13 0


7 - 112 6.111.98.5.01.13

Print foreign currency Submenu 11

Enter selection 1 Print conversion rate2 Print unit price, selling price and total3 Print selling price and total4 Only print total

0= No printout1= Printout

Save

Print amount paid in/out

Prerequisite - Pr 520/ 05- 1 or 2 Printout payment in/out

Requirements - Pr 520/ 05- 1 or 2 Printout payment in/out

Submenu 12

Enter selection


Confirm

Print supplementary texts

Prerequisite - Pr 110/PLU no./11 Assign supplement. text to article

Submenu 13

Enter selection


Confirm

�7


Pr550 14 __12

Pr550 15 __12


7 - 1136.111.98.5.01.13

Print header logo Submenu 14

Enter logo ID

0000 = Do not print logo0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID

Confirm

Header and footer logos can be created with Bizerba Label Designer and loaded onto thescale.Logos present in the scale can be printed out, see page 7 - 7.

Print footer logo Submenu 14

Enter logo ID

0000 = Do not print logo0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID

Confirm

�7


1

2

3

456

1

1

7

8

9

10

1112 13

1


7 - 114 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.20 Label design overview Information can be added, disabled or modified on the label.

1 Label textsPr 555/ 16 Print release for standard oralternative textsPr 555/ 20 and 21 Alternative texts

2 Sell-by datePr 555/ 05 PrintPr 110/ PLU-Nr./ 04 shelf-life daysPr 215/ 01 Non-PLU shelf-life days

3 Net weight4 Selling price

Fig. 85: Example of label 43 mm5 Unit price

Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 PLU unit price. . . . 6 Print price frame

Pr 555/ 167 Packaging date

Pr 555/ 05 Release print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 500/ 01 Enter date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 BarcodePr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 Enter article barcode. . . . . . . . Pr 215/ 2; 3; 4; 5 Enter non-PLU barcode and total barcode . . . . . . . . . . .

Pr 555/ 06 Release barcode print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 07 Enter height of barcode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Operator no.Pr 555/ 17

10 PLU article textPr 110/ PLU-No/ 10 Enter article text. . . . . . . . . Pr 110/ PLU-No/11 Assign supplem. text. . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 16 Release print of supplementary texts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 12 create beginning of text field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 13 create beginning of data field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 14 Set data field monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 Logo printoutPr 555/ 11

12 HeaderPr 201 Enter header text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 09 Release print of header text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 TareEnter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 Enter PLU tare value. . . . Pr 540 Enter tare value for the tare fixed value key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/08-1- Release tare print. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

�7



7 - 1156.111.98.5.01.13

BLD labels These labels are designed in BLD. The labels are issued a number and are sent to thescales and stored there.

_______________________________________________________________________

Release BLD text fields and logo fields in database configuration(memory management) Pr 606/ 3 and 4 see page 7 - 137

_______________________________________________________________________

1 Logo field 12 Text field 1

Fig. 86: Example of label layout in BLD

Allocate content for text field, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 12, on page7 - 45.Allocate content for logo field, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 13, on page7 - 46

1 Allocated logo in logo field 12 Allocated text in text field 1

Fig. 87: Example of BLD label in thescales

�7


1

2

1

2

Pr555 01


7 - 116 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.20.1 Create labels Pr 555. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 555

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Label type02= Select BLD labels03= Label size04= Change label distance05= Packaging and sell-by date on label06= Barcode on label07= Barcode height in mm on ticket08= Tare printout on label09= Print header text10= Alternative text with sell-by date11= Logo printout12= Beginning of text field13= Beginning of data field14= Monitoring data field15= Font change on label16= Print price frame and texts on label17= Print Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit * on label18= Print foreign currency19= Layout turned by 180º (only with label paper) and reversing operation20= Alternative text with packaging date21= Alternative text with packaging date22= Print units on the label23= Print speed for label layout

�7


Pr555 01 01


7 - 1176.111.98.5.01.13

Label type Submenu 01

Enter selection

00= Label from BLD, see 555 / 02, only possible if BLD layouts are available

Label type Width B x height H

01= Bizerba label standard 58mm x43 mm02= Bizerba label layout 1 58mm x43 mm03= Bizerba label layout 2 58mm x43 mm034= Bizerba label layout 3 58mm x43 mm

05= ISB with barcode 50mm x48 0006= ISB w/o barcode50mm x48 mm

07= Small label with barcode 33mm x47 mm08= Small label w/o barcode 33mm x47 mm09= Small label w/o barcode 37mm x 36 mm10= Bizerba label layout 4 58mm x38 mm

Confirm

Example:B Label widthH Label height

H

B

Fig.: 88: Standard 01 Layout 02

Fig.: 89: Small label 07 Small label 08

�7


Pr555 02 01

Pr555 03 043-58

Pr555 03 043-__

Pr555 03 043- 58

Pr555 04 16

Pr555 05 11

1 2


7 - 118 6.111.98.5.01.13

Select BLD labels Submenu 02

Enter selection 01... Select BLD label.Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01

Confirm

Label size Submenu 03

Input label height, e.g. 43mm

28-148 mm

Confirm

_______________________________________________________________________

Input of 54,55 or 56 is rejected.

_______________________________________________________________________

Enter label width e.g. 58mm

10-58 mm

Confirm

Change label distance Submenu 04

Enter distance

8-40dot (8dot= 1mm)

Confirm

Packaged-on and sell-by date on label Submenu 05

Enter selection 1 Packaging date2 Sell-by date


Confirm

�7


Pr555 06 11

1 2

Pr555 07 15

Pr555 08 1


7 - 1196.111.98.5.01.13

Barcode on label Submenu 06

Enter selection 1 Article barcode2 Totals Barcode


Confirm

Barcode height in mm Submenu 07

Enter height of barcode

5-22 mm Only effective for pre-defined labels.Not effective with BLD labels.

Confirm

12

33

Fig.: 90: Barcode height1 Beginning of text field2 Beginning of data field3 Barcode height

Tare printout on label Submenu 08

Enter selection

0= without tare printout1 = with tare printout

Confirm

�7


Pr555 09 01

Pr555 10 000000010

Pr555 11 0007


7 - 120 6.111.98.5.01.13

Print header text Submenu 09

Enter selection

00= Do not print header text01-99 = header text number see Pr 201

Confirm

1 Header field2 Logo3 Header text

Fig. 91: Header field

Alternative text for sell-by date Submenu 10

Enter selection

000000000= No alternative text. Standard text is printed1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200

Confirm

Logo printout Submenu 11

Enter logo ID

0000= without logo

0001= Logo Kesko

0002= Logo Tuko

0003= Logo Eko

0004= Logo Sokos A

0005= Logo Sokos B

0006= Logo C

0007= Logo Recycling

Confirm

�7


1

2

3

Pr555 12 00

Pr555 13 00

12

3

4

Fig. 92: Label fields


7 - 1216.111.98.5.01.13

Start of text field Submenu 12Beginning of text field in mm

00= Text field 1 automatically starts 11 mm from top edge of label11-84 = Beginning of text field in mm from top edge of label

Confirm

Start of data field Submenu 13Beginning of data field in mm

00= Data field is automatically positioned at the bottom edge of the label11-84 = Beginning of data field 2 in mm from top edge of label

Confirm

Example of label fields1 Start of text field 2 Beginning of data field3 Data field4 Label height

�7


Pr555 14 0


7 - 122 6.111.98.5.01.13

Data field monitoring Data field monitoring prevents the text field being pushed into the data field.

Submenu 14Enter selection

0 = no data field monitoring1= Data field monitoring is on

Confirm

Example: 3 supplement. texts were assigned to article ”Calf's liver” The supplementarytexts are not printed in the setting ”Data field monitoring activated”, as printing is in thedata field.

12

3

5

5

Fig. 93: Data field monitoring on no data field monitoring

1 Beginning of text field2 Beginning of data field3 Data field5 Article and supplementary texts

�7


Pr555 15 001

Pr555 16 1111111

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Pr555 17 0


7 - 1236.111.98.5.01.13

Font change on label A font can be defined for all print-outs. This font has priority over the PLU font.

Submenu 15Enter selection

000= Font from PLU001-1 10= fixed font

Confirm

Print price frame and texts on label Submenu 16

1 Print out standard text, e.g. ”Tare”2 Print standard text e.g. ”Packaged” or

alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/20)

3 Print standard text e.g. ”best before” oralternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 10and Pr555/ 21)

4 Print out standard text, e.g. ”Net or piece”5 Print out standard text, e.g. ”Price”6 Print out price frame7 Printout of supplementary texts


Save

Print operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label Submenu 17Enter selection

0= without output1 = with operator no. (no. input in Pr 530)2 =with machine ID (no. input in Pr 605)3= with digit code *

Confirm

�7


Pr555 18 1100

1 2 3 4

Pr555 19 11

1 2


7 - 124 6.111.98.5.01.13

Print foreign currency Submenu 18

1 Print conversion rate2 Print unit price, selling price and total3 Print selling price and total4 Only print total


Confirm

180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) Submenu 19Enter selection 1 1= Print layout rotated by 180º

2 1= Reverse label before printing

0 = No rotation and no reverse operation1 = Layout is printed rotated by 180º; label is reversed before printing

180° RotationFor labels with pre-print turned by 180

Fig.: 94: Example no rotation Example turned layout

�7



7 - 1256.111.98.5.01.13

Reverse operation for standard labelsWith labels the height of the header field can be of different sizesTherfore, the header on the following label cannot be pre-printed.

The label must be withdrawn to the label start before commencing printing (reverseoperation).

If a header text has been defined, this will be printed after reversing.If no header text has been defined, the header text area can be used for the article text.

If the label has a header field height of 10 mm, reversing is not necessary.

Reversing in the case of BLD labelsDuring the creation of freely programmable labels with the PC program Bizerba LabelDesigner, whether or not reverse operation is used for printing is defined.

The reversing function must be selected in the BLD project.

If reverse operation is selected, all fields, e.g. article or barcode, can be placed in theheader area. The layout is printed after reversing.

�7


Pr555 20 000000010

Pr555 21 000000000

Pr555 22 1111

1 2 3 4

Pr555 23 04


7 - 126 6.111.98.5.01.13

Alternative text for packaged-on date

Submenu 20

Enter text number

000000000= No alternative text print1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200

Confirm

Alternative text for use-by date

Submenu 21

Enter text number

000000000= No alternative text print1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200

Confirm

Print units on the label

Submenu 22

Enter selection 1 Print price with unit2 Print unit price with unit3 Print weight with unit4 Print tare with unit

0= Do not print1= Print unit

Confirm

Print speed for label layout Submenu 23The print result can be improved if the print speed is reduced

Enter selection

00= 44 mm/s01= 53 mm/s (e.g. for battery operation)02= 66 mm/s03= 88 mm/s04= 102 mm/s (Standard)

Confirm

�7


Pr556 01

Pr556 01 1


7 - 1276.111.98.5.01.13

7.20.2 Labels configuration management Pr 556. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All label settings in Pr 555 can be stored in Pr 556/01.

Prerequisite - The layout memory has to be deleted. - Pr 556/ 03 Clear layout memory


Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Save configuration from Pr 55502= Select label configuration03= Delete label configuration

Save configuration from Pr 555 Submenu 01

Enter selection

1= Layout memory 12= Layout memory 23= Layout memory 3

Confirm

�7


Pr556 02 0

Pr556 03 1 - 1

Pr556 03 2 - 1

Pr556 03 2 - 3


7 - 128 6.111.98.5.01.13

Select label configuration

Submenu 02

Enter selection

0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing1= Configuration from layout memory 12= Configuration from layout memory 23= Configuration from layout memory 3

Confirm

Delete label configuration Delete from memory x to memory xx = Layout memory 1-3

Submenu 03

Enter selection

Confirm

Enter selection

Confirm

The label configuration in memories 2 and 3 is deleted.

�7


Pr560 01

Pr560 01 0

Pr560 02 0


7 - 1296.111.98.5.01.13

7.20.3 Foreign currency settings Pr 560. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 560

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01 = Select foreign curreny function02= Select foreign/ second currency display03= Foreign currency calculating mode04= Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout05= Foreign currency characters on label for price field06= Decimal places of foreign currency07= Foreign currency factor08= Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)09= Rounding of foreign currency

Select foreign currency function Submenu 01

Enter selection

0= Euro/foreign currency off1= Foreign currency function on2= Euro function on (only possible for non-Euro devices)

Confirm

Select foreign/ second currency display Submenu 02

Enter selection

0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-functional)1= Foreign currency display on

Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and total in payment in/out mode

Confirm

�7


Pr560 03 0

Pr560 04 C11 LI H-

Pr560 05 C11 LI H-

Pr560 06 2


7 - 130 6.111.98.5.01.13

Foreign currency calculation method Submenu 03

Enter selection

0= Total calculated through conversion1= Total calculated through addition of selling price

Confirm

Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout Submenu 04

Enter currency symbol

See tet input page 7 - 11

Confirm

Foreign currency characters on label for price field Submenu 05

Enter currency symbol

See tet input page 7 - 11

Confirm

Decimal places in foreign currency Submenu 06

Enter selection

0- 3= Decimal places in foreign currency

Confirm

�7


Pr560 07 0

Pr560 08 0001,00

Pr560 09 0


7 - 1316.111.98.5.01.13

Foreign currency factor Submenu 07

Enter selection

0= factor 11= factor 102= factor 1003= factor 10004= factor 10000

Confirm

Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) Submenu 08

Enter selection

e.g. 0001.01

Confirm

Rounding of foreign currency Submenu 09

Enter selection


Confirm

�7


Pr600 01


7 - 132 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.21 Database configuration menu Pr 6--

_______________________________________________________________________

TCP-IP settings Pr 600

Display current IP address Pr 601

Print out of communication settings Pr 602

Setting scale number Pr 603

Setting department number Pr 604

Setting machine ID Pr 605

Database configuration Pr 606

Setting scale for system (continuous operation) Pr 607

Control display lightning Pr 610

Turn-of f time of scale Pr 615

WLAN settings Pr 621

Beeper on/off Pr 622

Sensitivity of scale Pr 625

Change key function Pr 630

Keyboard selection Pr 631

RAM clearing Pr 666

Enter password for menu Pr 690

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings Pr 695_______________________________________________________________________

7.21.1 TCP-IP settings Pr600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 600

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= DHCP02= Display of current scale IP address03= IP: IP address if no DHCP selected04= Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected05= Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected06= DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected06= DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected08= Host name: A name can be assigned to the scale. 32 ASCII characters are possible.09= Leasing address: Display of IP address that has been assigned to the scale by the

DHCP server.

�7

Database configuration Pr 6--

Pr600 01 0

Pr600 02 172017168010

Pr600 03 172017168010

Pr600 04 255255192000

Pr600 05 172017129001


7 - 1336.111.98.5.01.13

DHCP Submenu 01Enter selection

0= no DHCP, use fixed IP address1 = Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.

The leasing address has been requested, see Pr 600/09.

confirm

_______________________________________________________________________

If the DHCP server does not assign the requested leasing address,set the leasing address to 000000000000 in Pr 600/09.

The DHCP server can then assign the scale a new address.

_______________________________________________________________________

Display of current scale IP address

Submenu 02

Confirm

IP: IP address if no DHCP selectedSubmenu 03

Enter selection

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172.17.168.10 would be 172017168010

Confirm

Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selectedSubmenu 04

Enter selection

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g255.255.192.000 would be 255255192000.

Confirm

Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected Submenu 05

Enter selection


Confirm

�7


Pr600 06 010001001100

Pr600 07 010001001101

Pr600 08 C32 LI H-

Pr600 09 172017168008


7 - 134 6.111.98.5.01.13

DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected Submenu 06

Enter selection

Enter 12-digit number without point, e.g. 10.1.1.100 would be 010001001100

Confirm

DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selectedSubmenu 07

Enter selection


Confirm

Host name: Submenu 08

Enter name .32 ASCII characters are possible.

Confirm

Leasing address Display and inputThe scales are assigned an IP address (leasing address) by the DHCP server. To do this,DHCP has to be switched on, see Pr 600/01-1.If the scales are switched off, the assigned address remains reserved for a certain time. Ifthe displayed leasing address is not changed, the scales request this address again fromthe DHCP server after being switched on. By entering 000000000000 the DHCP server isrequested to assign a new address.

Submenu 09

Leasing address

Confirm

�7


Pr601 172017168010

Pr602 1

Pr603 12

Pr604 120


7 - 1356.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.2 Display current IP address Pr601. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 601

7.21.3 Print out of communication settings Pr602. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 602

Confirm

The communication settings are printed out

Fig. 95: Communication settings

7.21.4 Setting scale number Pr 603. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 603

Enter scale number 01-32

Confirm

7.21.5 Setting department number Pr604. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 604

Enter department number 001-999

Confirm

�7


Pr605 1234

Pr606 01


7 - 136 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.6 Setting machine ID Pr605. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 605

Enter machine ID

0001-9999

Confirm

7.21.7 Database configuration (memory management) Pr 606. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Text memory in the BC II is dynamic. These memories include texts and logos. Dependingon the request, either more or less memory can be released for PLU, texts, or ticket items.If changing a value, e.g. number of PLUs, causes the remaining memory to be too small,the entry is rejected. In this case, other values, e.g. number of BLD text fields have to bereduced.Select 606

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= No. of PLUs02= Number of supplementary texts per PLU03= Number of BLD text fields per PLU04= Number of BLD logo fields per PLU05= Number of supplementary texts06= Number of items (ticket memory)07= By Count, fixed weight and VAT08= Decimal places*88= Start database configuration

Examples of valid database configuration

2000 PLU4 supplementary texts per PLU10 BLD text fields3 BLD logo fields500 general texts1200 items

5000 PLU3 supplementary texts per PLU5 BLD text fields2 BLD logo fields1000 general texts1200 items

�7


Pr606 01 2000

Pr606 02 4

Pr606 03 0

Pr606 04 0

Pr606 05 0500


7 - 1376.111.98.5.01.13

No. of PLUs Submenu 01

Enter selection 0100 - 6000

Confirm

Number of supplementary texts per PLU Submenu 02


Confirm

Number of BLD text fields per PLU Submenu 03


Confirm

Number of BLD logo fields per PLU Submenu 04


Confirm

Number of supplementary texts Submenu 05


Confirm

�7

Database configuration Pr 6--Database configuration Pr 6--

Pr606 06 1200

Pr606 07 1111

1 2

3 4

Pr606 08 2


7 - 138 6.111.98.5.01.13

Number of items (ticket memory) Submenu 06


Confirm

By Count, fixed weight, VAT and tare % See overview Define By count articles, page 7 - 30.Submenu 07

Enter selection 1 1= By Count on2 1= Fixed weight on3 1= Activate VAT4 1= Tare % approved

If tare % is approved, percentage value can be entered in Pr110/ 22.

0= off1= on

Confirm

Decimal places* *This menu is not valid for all countries.Submenu 08

Enter selection

0-3 = Number of decimal places

4= Country-dependent Standard value

Confirm

�7


Pr606 88 375539

Pr606 88 ____90


7 - 1396.111.98.5.01.13

Start Database configuration Submenu 88

Remaining available memory is displayed.

Enter selection

81 = RAM clearing is carried out and the set configuration values are saved. The scaleboots.

90= RAM clearing is carried out and the standard values are saved.The standard values are specific to country.

Confirm�7


Pr 607 01

Pr 607 01 1


7 - 140 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.8 Setting scale for system (continuous operation) Pr 607. . . . . . . . . . . .

Continuous operation in system see page 7 - 36.Function as of program version 2.00.

_______________________________________________________________________

Always note!- There must be only one master scale in a scale system.- Each scale within the system must have an own network IP

address (Pr 600)

_______________________________________________________________________

Select607

Enter submenu 01-04

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Scale type02= Multicast IP address03= Multicast port number04= UDP Port number

Scale type Submenu 01

Enter selection

0= standard scale (Stand alone)1= Slave scale (system)9= Master scale (system)

Confirm

�7


Pr 607 02 239192000024

Pr 607 03 06789

Pr 607 04 01031


7 - 1416.111.98.5.01.13

System conditions with slave scales.If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrollingmessage on the display.

- ”Scale Network off”Scale not entered in system yet.

- ”Scale Update”Update of system data running.

- If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and masterdata from master scale are stored.

- Arrow in display flashes = Slave scale in system.

_______________________________________________________________________

If the system arrow flashes , the device in the system is a masterscale.

_______________________________________________________________________

Multicast IP address Submenu 02The Multicast IP address indicates to which system the scale was assigned. Any addresswithin the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 can be assigned. All scales in onesystem must have the same Multicast IP address.

Enter address

Confirm

Multicast port number Submenu 03Basically the works setting must not be changed.

Work setting Multicast port number

Confirm

UDP port number Submenu 04Basically the works setting must not be changed.

Works setting UDP port number

Confirm

�7


Pr610 00


7 - 142 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.9 Control display lighting Pr 610. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 610

Enter selection

00= Display lighting can only be switched on or off manually.

01-99 = Time in seconds.Display lighting is automatically switched on or off after the set time.

Confirm

Switch display lighting on manually:

+ Press and hold key<Shift>

then press key<Switching>.

The display lighting is switched on or off.

Automatic control of the display lighting:

After the last action performed on the scale, the display lighting switches off automaticallyafter a period of between 1 to 99 seconds.Setting 01 Display off after approx. 1 second.Setting 99 Display off after approx. 99 secondsWhen another action starts on the scale, the display lighting is switched on againautomatically.

_______________________________________________________________________

When the display lighting is controlled automatically, the lighting canstill be manually switched off.

If the display lighting is switched off manually, the display lighting canonly be switched on again manually.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7


Pr615 00

Pr621 01


7 - 1436.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.10 Turn-off time of scale Pr615. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

After a set time the scale is switched off, providing no key function or weight movementtakes place.

PrerequisiteA switch key as main switch.

With the on/off switch, the scale must be manually switched off.

Select615

Enter selection

00= Scale is not turned off.01-99 = Time in minutes, after which the scales are switched off, if no keys are pressed and

no weight movement has taken place.

Confirm

7.21.11 WLAN settings Pr 621

Prerequisite - A WLAN module must be integrated into the scale.

_______________________________________________________________________

Settings can only be made in submenus 02 to 07 if WLAN isdeactivated; 621/ 01-0.

If - 00000000 has been entered in 621/02, WLAN cannot be activated.

_______________________________________________________________________

Select 621

confirm

Submenu overview:01= Switch on WLAN02= Time slices03= Ping on/off04= IP address of WLAN module05= Test telegram on/off06= IP address of telegram recipient07= Port number of telegram recipient

�7


Pr621 01 0

Pr621 02 _ -________

Pr606 02 1 -00000000

Pr621 02 1 - ________

Pr621 02 1 -20000800

1 2

Pr621 02 _ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Pr621 02


7 - 144 6.111.98.5.01.13

Activate WLAN Submenu 01

Enter selection 0 = WLAN off1 = WLAN off

Confirm

_______________________________________________________________________

Procedure for WLAN activation:- Deactivate WLAN 621/ 01 -0- Make settings in submenus 02 to 07- Activate WLAN 621/ 01 - 1

_______________________________________________________________________

Time slices The time for which WLAN is to be active can be set.

Submenu 02

Enter time slice no. e. g. 1 0 - 3

Confirm

Enter start and end time 1 Start time e.g. 8 p.m.2 End e.g. 08.00 a.m.

Active for the whole day= enter 00010001.

Time slice inactive= enter 00000000.

Confirm

Esc Press<ESC>

You can now select submenu 3.

�7


Pr621 03 _300

Pr621 04 172017168001


7 - 1456.111.98.5.01.13

Ping on/off If ping is activated, the scale sends a ping to the WLAN module at set time intervals.

Submenu 03

Enter time Recommended setting 300 sec.

0000= Ping off1-9999 = Ping on; time in sec. between 2 pings.

Confirm

IP address of WLAN module The WLAN module is pinged by the scale, so that it always remains in active status.

Submenu 04

Enter IP address

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 is 172.17.168.1

Confirm

�7


Pr621 05 0900

Pr621 06 172017168001

Pr621 07 49152

Pr622 111

1 2 3


7 - 146 6.111.98.5.01.13

Submenus 05, 06 and 07 enable functional diagnosis of the WLAN.

Test telegram on/off A test telegram is periodically sent to a host.

Submenu 05

Enter time

0000= Telegram off1-9999 = Send telegram on; time in sec. between 2 telegrams.

Confirm

IP address of telegram recipient Submenu 06

Enter IP address

Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 is 172.17.168.1

Confirm

Port number of telegram recipient Submenu 07

Enter port number

1 - 65536

Confirm

7.21.12 Beeper on/off Pr 622

Enter selection 1 Regular beeper2 Acceptance beeper3 Error beeper

0= Beeper off1 = Beeper on

Save

�7


Pr625 0


7 - 1476.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.13 Sensitivity of scale (display) Pr625. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The sensitivity setting regulates damping in the event of vibrations at the place ofinstallation (e.g. market operation).

_______________________________________________________________________

The higher the setting, the longer the time until standstill of thedisplay.

_______________________________________________________________________

Select 625

Enter selection

0= Display sensitive (standard) with stable, vibration-free scale floor area

1

2

..

5= Display insensitive to vibrations

increasingly insensitive

Confirm

�7


Pr630 0

Pr630 _____

Pr630 32817

Pr630 33281

Pr630 _____


7 - 148 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.14 Change key function Pr 630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prerequisite - Pr 631 - 03 84-digit keyboard; must be set.

Select 630

Press <Enter> key.

The function is active.

50{

Press any key e.�g.�<PLU

50>.The function code of thiskey is displayed.

Enter new functional code

e.�g.�<33281> for fixedtare 2.

Press <Enter> key.

The new key function issaved.Another key can bemodified.

Press <Mod>. The menu is exited.

_______________________________________________________________________

- The function code of reserved keys e.g. <Mod>; <ESC>; <C> etc.

is not displayed and cannot be modified.

- If <00000> is entered instead of a function code, the standardfunction code becomes active.

- In menu 630 all keys are reset to the standard function code with<CTRL> and <9>.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7


Pr631 03


7 - 1496.111.98.5.01.13

Overview of keyboard function code

Code Function12 Paper feed32768 - 33023 Direct PLU key 1 - 25633024 - 33039 Direct operator key 1 - 1633280 - 33283 Fixed tare key 1 - 433344 VAT key 133345 VAT key 233346 VAT key 333347 VAT key 433348 VAT key 533538 Tare33539 Subtotal33540 Total33541 Constant33542 Manual33543 Minus33544 Cancellation33546 Multiplication33548 Switch from PLU input to price input33580 Set scale to zero33588 Operator tare33589 Save operator tare34066 Date key34069 Print key

7.21.15 Keyboard selection Pr631. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 631

Enter selection

00= 84-keyboard standard01= 84-keyboard with 24 self-service frame02= 84-keyboard with 30-front foil03= 84-keyboard reprogrammed. (e.g. keyboard changes from host)

Confirm

Keyboards, see page 5 - 7

�7


Pr666 00

Pr666 81

PASS

PASS 000000


7 - 150 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.16 RAM clearing Pr 666. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 666

Enter 81

Confirm

RAM is cleared_______________________________________________________________________

The following settings remain even after the RAM clearing:

- Communication settings in Pr 600

- Printer settings in Pr 710

- Machine ID Pr 605

- Database configuration (memory management). The values set inPr 606 are applied.

_______________________________________________________________________

7.21.17 Enter password for menu Pr 690. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 690

Enter password

000000 = Password is deactivatedXXXXXX= Enter 6 numbers

Confirm

Password input is activated.

If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.

�7


Pr695 01

Pr695 01 0

Pr695 02 1


7 - 1516.111.98.5.01.13

7.21.18 Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting Pr 695. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 695

Enter submenu

Submenu overview:01= Change main currency to second currency (Euro)02= Convert PLU price into EURO

Confirm

Change main currency to second currency (Euro)Submenu 01

Enter selection

0= Main currency in old local currency1= Main currency in new local currency

Confirm

Convert PLU price into EUROSubmenu 02_______________________________________________________________________

This function can only be called up if the old local currency is stillactive.

Sales figures are not converted. Sales should be deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________

Confirm

The prices are converted and the second currency is then changed toautomatically.

�7



7 - 152 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.22 Service menu Pr 7--

_______________________________________________________________________

Test print Pr 700

Print boot log information Pr 701

Print fonts Pr 702

Print menu settings Pr 703

Print weighing system information Pr 704

Printer settings Pr 710

Display ADC programming version Pr 712

Display load cell type Pr 715

Program version Pr 716

Display battery voltage Pr 717

Display test Pr 718

Logbook control Pr 730

_______________________________________________________________________

7.22.1 Test print Pr 700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 700

Confirm

Fig. 96: Test printing

7.22.2 Print boot log information Pr 701. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 701

Confirm

Fig. 97: Example of log information

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr702 1

Pr703 0


7 - 1536.111.98.5.01.13

7.22.3 Print fonts Pr702. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 702

Print with ticket paper

Confirm

All fonts are printed.

Print with labels

Confirm

The first 4 fonts are printed.

Fig. 98: Fonts

Confirm

The next 4 fonts are printed.Press the <Total> key as often as required until all font types have been printed.

7.22.4 Print menu settings Pr703. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 703

Confirm

The current menu settings are being printed.

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr704 0


7 - 154 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.22.5 Print weighing system information Pr 704. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 704

Confirm

Weighing system information is printed.

Fig. 99: Weighing systeminformation

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr710 01

Pr710 01 12

Pr710 02 12


7 - 1556.111.98.5.01.13

7.22.6 Printer settings Pr 710. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 710

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01 = Feed for labels (+/- 1.5mm)02= Move print format on the label (+/- 1.5mm)03= Correct ticket feed (+/- 2.5mm)04= Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket

Feed for labelsSubmenu 01

Enter selection

00-1 1= minus infeed12= Standard settings13-24 = plus infeed

Confirm

Move print format on the label Submenu 02

Enter selection

00-1 1= minus infeed12= Standard settings13-24 = plus infeed

Confirm

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr710 03 20

Pr710 04 40

Pr710 05 0


7 - 156 6.111.98.5.01.13

Correct ticket feed Submenu 03

Enter selection

00-19 = minus infeed20= Standard settings21-40 = plus infeed

Confirm

Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticketIn the case of printers with light barriers (label printer) this is where sensitivity forpaper-end detection is set.When the end of the paper is reached, printing is automatically interrupted and the displayshows the message ”PAPER END”.

Submenu 04

Enter selection

00= End of paper detection off

40= standard

..

99= insensitive

increasingly insensitive

Confirm

Change printing intensityIf the barcode is upside down the readability can be improved by reducing the printingintensity.

Submenu 05

Enter selection

0= no reduction1= Reduce the printing intensity by 10%2= Reduce the printing intensity by 20%3= Reduce the printing intensity by 30%

Confirm

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr712 6026500004

Pr715 Cod 150502 1


7 - 1576.111.98.5.01.13

7.22.7 Display ADC programming version Pr 712. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 712

7.22.8 Display load cell type Pr 715. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 715 �7

Service Pr 7--

Pr716 01

Pr716 01 00661117100140

Pr716 02 00061119500110

Pr716 03 00161117200140

Pr716 04 00061117300150

Pr716 05 00061117400140

Pr716 06 00061117500130

Pr716 07 00061117600110

Pr716 08 00061117700120

Pr716 09 61117000140


7 - 158 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.22.9 Display program version Pr 716. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 716

Enter submenu

Confirm

Submenu overview:01= Main program version number02= Bootloader version number03 = Option resource version number04= Layout resource version number05= Menu resource version number06= Text resource version number07= Keyboard resource version number08= Font resource version number09= Software version number (SAP number)

Main program version numberSubmenu 01

Bootloader version numberSubmenu 02

Option resource version numberSubmenu 03

Layout resource version numberSubmenu 04

Menu resource version numberSubmenu 05

Text resource version numberSubmenu 06

Keyboard resource version numberSubmenu 07

Font resource version numberSubmenu 08

Software version numberSubmenu 09

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr7171

Pr71712,218


7 - 1596.111.98.5.01.13

7.22.10 Display battery voltage Pr717. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 717

confirm

_______________________________________________________________________

If the scale is connected to the mains, the supply voltage(approx. 12 V) is displayed.

- Disconnect scale from mains.The battery voltage is displayed.

_______________________________________________________________________

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr718 1

Pr730 01


7 - 160 6.111.98.5.01.13

7.22.11 Display test Pr 718. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select 718

Confirm

The display shows all figures and symbols.

Fig. 100: Display test

Close display test

7.22.12 Logbook control Pr 730

In menu Pr 730, Welmec information from the logbook can be queried.

Enter submenu

01= Display logbook02= Print logbook

Confirm

Display logbook

Submenu 01

Step 1 Software identification number. (Software ID)

Accessing information

Entries from installation are displayed in three steps.

Consecutive number of logbook entry,Department number,Component number.

Version number of the loaded software.

Date and time of download.

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr

Pr730 01

Pr730 01 1

Pr730 A10F 002 0200

1 2 3

Pr730 9 20 12

1 2 3

Pr730 A10F 002 0200

1 2 3

Pr730 140910 1058

1 2


7 - 1616.111.98.5.01.13

Example: Accessing logbook entries

Press key<Mod>.

Press the keys <7> <3> <0> on

10-digit keyboard.

Press key <Enter> .

Press key Enter<>.

for step 1 1 Software ID2 Version number of legally relevant part3 Version number of legally non-relevant part

Press key Enter < for further steps.>

1 Serial number of the entry2 Department number3 Component number

1 Software ID2 Version number of legally relevant part3 Version number of legally non-relevant part

1 Date DDMMYY2 Time

�7

Service Pr 7--

Pr730 8 20 12

1 2 3

Pr730 bc 01 001 0170

1

Pr730 090410 1432

1 2

Pr730 02

1 2 3 4 5 6


7 - 162 6.111.98.5.01.13

If there are further entries in the logbook, the next entry is displayed.

1 Serial number of the entry2 Department number3 Component number

1 Version number of the loaded software

1 Date2 Time

Hold down the <Enter>key until all logbook entries are displayed.Once all entries are displayed, the scale shows the next submenu.

Print logbook

Requirement - Ticket paper is in the printer. - Pr 505 -0 Ticket paper

Submenu 02

Confirm

Logbook is printed. 1 Serial number of the entry2 Department number3 Component number4 Version number of the loaded software5 Date6 Time

Fig. 101: Logbook printout

�7

Service Pr 7--


7 - 1636.111.98.5.01.13

7.23 Programming overview

Menus marked with an asterisk *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for allcountry versions.

PLU maintenance

Menu Sub. see page

Define PLU Enter PLUPLU number Pr 110 7 - 40

Unit price 01 7 - 41

Product group 02 7 - 41

Tare 03 7 - 41

Shelf life days 04 7 - 42

Barcode for article 05 7 - 42

Price overwriting0= not permissible1= permissible

06 7 - 43

Article type0= weighed1= hand2= minus3= By Count (Price refers to piece per package)4= Fixed weight5= By Count fixed weight (fixed weight and price relate topieces per package)

07 7 - 43

Weight class0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb

08 7 - 44

Data of origin0= without data of origin1= with data of origin

09 7 - 44

Enter PLU article text(PLU number 0001-9999)Traceability text (number 9900-9999)

10 7 - 44

Supplementary text XX - YYYYYYYYYXX = Supplementary text 01-04YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200

11 7 - 45

Supplementary text for BLD text fields XX -YYYYYYYYYXX= Supplementary text 01-10YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200

12 7 - 45

Logo printing in BLD logo fields 1-3 13 7 - 46

�7

Programming overview


7 - 164 6.111.98.5.01.13

PLU maintenance

Menu Sub. see page

Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes00 to99

14 7 - 46

Unit price back-calculation0= Without back calculation1= with back-calculation (the unit price per piece or forfixed weight per kg is calculated)

15 7 - 47

Mandatory input of pieces0 = no mandatory input1= with mandatory input

16 7 - 47

Fixed weight 00000-99999 17 7 - 47

Fixed weight mode(A second representation is also printed in brackets)0= Standard1= lbs (g)2= oz (lbs)3= oz (g)4= lbs (oz)

18 7 - 47

Mandatory input of fixed weight0 = no mandatory input1= with mandatory input

19 7 - 48

Assign VAT number to a PLU 1-5 20 7 - 48

VAT can be overwritten0= cannot be overwritten1= can be overwritten

21 7 - 48

Tare % 000,00 (country-dependent) 22 7 - 49

Print PLU (article) lists Pr 115 7 - 50

Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with all article lines 01 7 - 50

Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with only the first article line 02 7 - 50

Delete single PLU (articles) Pr 120 7 - 51

Delete PLUs (articles) from xxxxxx to yyyyyy Pr 121 7 - 51

�7



7 - 1656.111.98.5.01.13

Data maintenance

Menu Sub. see page

Supplement. texts enter text number 1-999999999 Pr 200 7 - 52

Define supplementary text

Define header and footer textsEnter text number 01-99

Pr 201 7 - 53

Define header and footer text

Define scrolling messageEnter text number 01-99

Pr 202 7 - 54

Print texts Pr 205 7 - 55

Print supplementary texts 01

Print header and footer texts 02

Print scrolling message 03

Delete texts Pr 206 7 - 56

Delete single supplementary text 01

Delete all supplementary texts 02

Delete header and footer texts 03

Delete scrolling message text 04 7 - 57

Define barcode structure Pr 210 7 - 58

Barcode format 01

Code constant 02 7 - 59

Numerical codes 03 7 - 59

Check and adopt code structure 04 7 - 61

Managing barcode structures Pr 211 7 - 62

Print code structures 01 7 - 62

Delete code structures 02 7 - 62

Code structure number for all PLUs 03 7 - 63

Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position 04 7 - 63

Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position 05 7 - 63

�7



7 - 166 6.111.98.5.01.13

Data maintenance

Menu Sub. See page

Non-PLU settings Pr 215 7 - 64

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

01 7 - 64

Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles 02 7 - 65

Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piecegoods)

03 7 - 65

Barcode for non-PLU minus articles 04 7 - 65

Barcode for total 05 7 - 65

Product group for non-PLU weighed 06 7 - 66

Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piecegoods)

07 7 - 66

Product groups for non-PLU minus articles 08 7 - 66

VAT for non-PLU weighed 09 7 - 67

VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 10 7 - 67

VAT for non-PLU minus articles 11 7 - 67

Print BLD label list/ logo list Pr 220 7 - 68

Print BLD label list 01

Print logos 02

Delete BLD labels/logos Pr 225

Delete BLD label list from - to 01 7 - 69

Delete BLD logos from - to 02 7 - 69

Create VAT Enter VAT number 1-5

Pr 230 7 - 69

VAT set 0-99,99 01 7 - 70

Incl. or excl. VAT0= Incl. VAT (gross prices)1= Excl. VAT (net prices)

02 7 - 70

VAT text , 20 characters possible 03

Manage VAT Pr 231 7 - 71

Print list with VAT rates 0 01

Delete VAT sets 1...5 - 1...5 02

Use VAT:0= Use VAT from PLU and Non-PLU.1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles.

03

�7



7 - 1676.111.98.5.01.13

Data maintenance

Menu Sub. see page

Configure report layout Pr 300 7 - 72

Printing prices0= Prices are not printed1= Prices are printed

01 7 - 72

Printing PLU without sales0= PLUs without sales are not printed1= PLUs without sales are printed

02 7 - 72

Printing customer title for PLU report00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

03 7 - 72

Printing customer title for product group report00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

04

Printing customer title for operator report00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

05

Printing customer title for total scale sales and sales ope‐rator report00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

06

Printing customer title for data of origin report00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

07

Printing customer title for VAT report00= Standard title; 01-99 = Text number

08

�7



7 - 168 6.111.98.5.01.13

Data maintenance

Menu Sub. see page

Print reports on ticket Pr 310 7 - 74

Scale report0= Print or delete report1= Print or delete report

01 7 - 74

PLU report with one article text line0= Print report without deleting1= Print or delete report

02 7 - 74

PLU report with all article text lines0= Print report without deleting1= Print or delete report

03 7 - 75

Product group report 04 7 - 76

Operator report0= Print report without deleting1= Print or delete report

05 7 - 77

Traceability data - sales report with one traceability textline0= Print or delete report1= Print or delete report

06 7 - 77

Traceability data - sales report with all traceability textlines0= Print or delete reports1= Print or delete report

07 7 - 78

VAT sales report0= Print or delete report1= Print or delete report

08 7 - 79

Print report on label Pr 311 7 - 79

Print total sales of scale 01 7 - 79

Display / delete sales Pr 320 7 - 80

Display total sales of scale 01 7 - 80

Delete total sales of scale 02 7 - 80

�7



7 - 1696.111.98.5.01.13

Configuration Menu Sub. see page

Setting date and time Pr 500 7 - 81

Set date 01 7 - 82

Set time 02 7 - 82

Print year number with either 2 or 4 digits0= Year with 2 digits1= Year with 4 digits

03 7 - 82

Date representation variants00= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.0600= Day-month-year alphanumeric e.g 21.07.0602= Day-month alphanumeric e.g 21 July03= Month-year alphanumeric e.g July0604= Month Day Year American numeric05= Month Day Year American alphanumeric06= Year month day Hungarian numeric06= Year month day Hungarian alphanumeric00= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.0609= Day month year alphanumeric e.g. 21 July 06

04 7 - 83

Select paper type0= Ticket paper1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)

Pr 505 7 - 84

Set main operating mode Pr 510 7 - 84

Select main operating mode01= Multi-operator mode02= Self-service mode03= Quick-service mode04= Price labeling with manual triggering05= Price labeling with automatic start

01 7 - 85

Select layout0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)1= Label layout

02 7 - 85

Addition of customer total0 = without addition of customer total1 = with addition of customer total

03 7 - 85

�7



7 - 170 6.111.98.5.01.13


Set switching operating mode Pr 511 7 - 86

Select switching operating mode01= Multi-operator mode02= Self-service mode03= Quick-service mode04= Price labeling with manual triggering05= Price labeling with automatic start

01 7 - 86

Select layout0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)1= Label layout

02 7 - 86

Addition of customer total0 = without addition of customer total1 = with addition of customer total

03 7 - 87

Settings for different operating modes Pr 515 7 - 87

Automatic zerosetting0= Scale is set to zero.1=Zerosetting error 115 is displayed2= Scale is not zeroset.

01 7 - 87

Open tickets / labels 0= open tickets are printed. after scale off/on 1= open tickets are not printed out and deleted

02 7 - 88

Traceability marker0= Traceability marker is off.1= Enter traceability no. manually2= Traceability number rigidly defined

03

Define traceability number00-99 Use defined traceability number.

04

Negative customer total permitted/not permitted0= The total cannot become negative during sale1= the total cannot become negative during sale

05 7 - 88

Sales calculation0= The sold items are not added to total memory1= The sold items are added to total memory

06 7 - 89

Mandatory input for By Count pieces0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 16)1= Mandatory input for By Count piece

07

Mandatory input for fixed weight0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 19)1= Mandatory input of fixed weight

08

�7



7 - 1716.111.98.5.01.13


Scrolling message setting Pr 516 7 - 90

Select scrolling message00= Scrolling message not active01-99 =Scrolling message number from Pr 202

01

Display on0= Customer side1= Operator side2= On both sides

02

Activation of scrolling message0= when display is occupied or empty1= only when display is empty

03

Test scrolling message 04

Settings for multiple-operator mode Pr 520 7 - 91

Constant key function0= Only fix the unit price during sale1= Only fix the tare value during sale2= Fix unit price and tare value during sale

01

Print article and total label0= Print article labels and total label1= Only print total label2= Only print article labels

02 7 - 92

Operator items display mode 0001= Display for sheet cancellation1= Display after registration1= Display for total/subtotal

03 7 - 93

Cash register functions0= Cash drawer does not open1= Cash register opens with/without sale with total and

operator key2= Cash register opens only with sale with total and ope‐

rator key3= Cash register opens with/without sale with total and

operator key4= Cash register opens only with sale with total and ope‐

rator key

04

Payment in/out0= without payment in/out1= Payment in/out with a currency2= Combined payment in/out in local currency and fo‐

reign currency *

05 7 - 94

�7



7 - 172 6.111.98.5.01.13


Talon printout00= without talon 01-99= with talon the entered number corresponds to

the delay time in seconds

Pr 520 06 7 - 94

Repeat ticket0= without repeat ticket1 = with repeat ticket

07

Open ticket again0= without repeat ticket1 = with ticket reopening

08

Print cancellation and canceled articles0= no printout1= with printout

09 7 - 95

Printing included VAT0= no printout1= with printout

10 7 - 95

Print ticket after <Total>0= Print ticket as requested with<Shift> +<OPx>)1= Print ticket always

11 7 - 95

Setting for quick-service mode0 =Article accessing via PLU-direct key, registration with

operator key.1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, registration is auto‐

matic.

Pr 521 7 - 96

�7



7 - 1736.111.98.5.01.13


Settings for price labeling mode * Pr 525 7 - 97

Labeling mode0= Label printing with

sales price ”0.00” is notsupported.

1= Weight labeling label print with selling price ”0.00” ispossible.

2= Weight labeling label print with selling price”0.00” is possible.

01

Piece price multi- label printing00= Labels are printed one after the other

without delay.01 - 99 = Delay time in seconds. Labels

are printed consecutively with delay.

02

Configure operator keys with operator no.TT-VVVTT (keys 1-16)VW (operator 1-999)

Pr 530 7 - 99

�7



7 - 174 6.111.98.5.01.13


PLU input mode and range limitation Pr 535 7 - 99

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input0 = Unit price via 10-key keypad

Switching to PLU input with switch key1 = PLU no. input via 10-key keypad

Switching to unit price input with switch key2 = PLU no. input only via 10-key keypad

01

PLU input:Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.2= PLU input with 2 digits 3= PLU input with 3 digits4= PLU input with 4 digits5= PLU input with 5 digits6= PLU input with 6 digits

02 7 - 100

PLU-direct key mode0= PLU-key no. (PLU direct keyboard) corresponds to

the PLU no.1= PLU-direct keyboard is locked2= PLU number results from the PLU key assignment,

see sub 4

03

PLU direct key allocationXXX-YYYYYYXXX= PLU direct key 001-246YYYYYY PLU number 001-999999

04

PLU range limitation000001-999999

05 7 - 101

PLU call delay time0= PLU is called with <Enter> or after entering all digits.1-20 = The PLU is displayed after a delay time. 1= small

delay; 20= big delay

06 7 - 102

Print PLU direct keys Pr 536 7 - 103

Tare fixed value memory 1-4X-YYYYX= Direct tare key 1-4YYYY= Assigned tare

Pr 540 7 - 104

�7



7 - 1756.111.98.5.01.13


Rounding and price calculation settings for nationalcurrency

Pr 545 7 - 104

Rounding methods for customer total0= no rounding1= rounding to 52 = rounding to 103= rounding to 504= rounding to 1005 = mathematical rounding to 5*6= mathematical rounding to 10*7= mathematical rounding to 25*8= mathematical rounding to 50*9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

01 7 - 105

Rounding of article total0= no rounding1= rounding to 52 = rounding to 103= rounding to 504= rounding to 1005 = mathematical rounding to 5*6= mathematical rounding to 10*7= mathematical rounding to 25*8= mathematical rounding to 50*9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

02 7 - 105

Rounding for By Count0= mathematical1= round up next position

03

�7



7 - 176 6.111.98.5.01.13


Ticket design overview 7 - 107

Design ticket Pr 550 7 - 108

Print barcode on ticket 0001= PLU barcode on; 0= off1= Total barcode on; 0= off1= Talon barcode on; 0= off

01

Barcode height in mm on ticket5-22 mm

02 7 - 108

Print tare on ticket0= Do not print tare value on ticket1= Tare value net weight is identified with N (country-‐dependent character)2 = Tare value on ticket net weight is not identified with N

03 7 - 109

Print header text00= without header text01-99 = Header text number

04

Print footer text00= without footer text01-99 = Footer text number

05

Foreign currency suppl.text000000000= without foreign currency suppl. text1-999999999 = Foreign currency suppl. text number

06 7 - 110

Rounding suppl. text 000000000= without rounding suppl. text1-999999999 = Rounding suppl. text number

07 7 - 110

Font type change on ticket000= Font from PLU001-1 10= fixed font

08

Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket0= all article text lines are printed1-9 = the corresponding number of lines is printed10= Text lines not printed

09

Ticket counter printout0= Counter is not printed1= Counter is printed

10 7 - 111

�7



7 - 1776.111.98.5.01.13


Print foreign currency 00001= Print conversion rate1= Print unit price, selling price and total1= Print selling price and total1= Only print total

Pr 550 11 7 - 112

Print amount paid in/out0= no printout1= Printout

12 7 - 112

Print supplementary texts0= no printout1= Printout

13 7 - 112

Print header logo0000= No printout1-9999 = Print logo with specified ID

14 7 - 113

Print footer logo0= no printout1-9999 = Print logo with specified ID

15 7 - 113

Label design - overview 7 - 114

BLD labels 7 - 115

Design label Pr 555 7 - 116

Label type00= label from BLD01 ... predefined label from scales

01 7 - 117

Select BLD labelOnly valid if 00 stands in 555/011.. Select BLD label.

02 7 - 118

Label size HHH-WWHHH= Label height 28-105 mmWW= Label width 10-58 mm

03

Change label distance8-40 dot ( 8dot= 1mm)

04

Packaged-on and sell-by date on label 001= Packaging date on; 0= off1= Sell-by date on; 0= off

05 7 - 118

Barcode on label 001= PLU barcode on; 0= off1= Total barcode on; 0= off

06 7 - 119

�7



7 - 178 6.111.98.5.01.13


Barcode height in mm5 - 22mm

Pr 555 07

Tare printout on label0= without tare1= with tare

08

Print header text 00= without header text01-99 = header text number

09 7 - 120

Alternative text with sell-by date000000000= No alternative text.1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text

10 7 - 120

Logo printout Enter0000= without logo0001-9999 = Logo ID (print logo)

11 7 - 120

Start of text fieldStart of text field in mm 11 - 84

12 7 - 121

Start of data fieldStart of data field in mm 11 - 84

13

Data field monitoring0= off1 = active

14 7 - 122

Font change on label0= Font from PLU1= fixed font

15 7 - 123

Print price frame and texts on label: 00000001= Print ”TARE”1= Print ”Packaged on”1= Print ”Sell by”1= Print ”Net” or ”Pcs”1= Print ”Price”1= Print price frame1= Printout suppl. text

16 7 - 123

�7



7 - 1796.111.98.5.01.13


Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit on label0= without output1= with operator no.2= with machine ID3= with digit code *

Pr 555 17 7 - 123

Print foreign currency: 00001= Print conversion rate1= Print unit price, selling price and total1= Print selling price and total1= Only print total

18 7 - 124

Rotate label layout by 180oand reverse operation11 1= Print label rotated1= Reverse label before printing

19

Alternative text for packaged-on date0= Standard text from resource1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200

20 7 - 126

Alternative text for use-by date0= Standard text from resource1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200

21 7 - 126

Print units on the label 1111 1= Print price per unit1= Print unit price per unit1= Print weight with unit1= Print tare with unit

22 7 - 126

Print speed for label layout00= 44 mm/s01= 53 mm/s (Battery operation)02= 66 mm/s03= 88 mm/s04= 102 mm/s (Standard)

23 7 - 126

�7



7 - 180 6.111.98.5.01.13


Label configuration management Pr 556 7 - 127

Save configuration from 5551-3 Layout memory is only possible if memory is deleted

(556 / 03)

01

Select label configuration0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing1= Configuration from memory 12= Configuration from memory 23= Configuration from memory 3

02 7 - 128

Delete label configurationDelete memory 1-3

03

Foreign currency settings Pr 560 * 7 - 129

Select foreign currency function0= Euro/foreign currency off1= Euro function on2= Foreign currency function on

01

Select foreign/ second currency display0= Foreign currency display off

(Euro or foreign currency key non-operational)1= Foreign currency display on

Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and total in payment in/out mode

02

Calculation method for foreign currency0= Total calculated through conversion1= Total calculated through addition of

selling price

03 7 - 130

Foreign currency characters for ticket and label layout 04

Foreign currency characters on label for price field 05

Decimal places in foreign currency0-3 decimal places

06

Foreign currency factor0-4 Factor 1 / 10 / 100 / 1000 /10000

07 7 - 131

�7



7 - 1816.111.98.5.01.13


Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)e.g. 0001.01 (national unit e.g. €)

Pr 560 08

Rounding of foreign currency0= no rounding1= rounding to 52 = rounding to 103= rounding to 504= rounding to 1005 = mathematical rounding to 5*6= mathematical rounding to 10*7= mathematical rounding to 25*8= mathematical rounding to 50*9 = mathematical rounding to 100*

09 7 - 131

�7



7 - 182 6.111.98.5.01.13

Database configuration Menu Sub. see page

TCP-IP settings Pr 600 7 - 132

DHCP0= No DHCP, use fixed IP addresses1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.

01 7 - 133

Display of current IP address 02

IP: IP address if no DHCP selected 03

Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected 04

Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected 05

DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCPselected

06 7 - 134

DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCPselected

07

Enter host name 32 ASCII characters are possible. 08

Leasing address from DHCP 09

Display current IP address Pr 601 7 - 135

Printout of communication settings Pr 602

Set scale no01 - 32

Pr 603

Set department no001-999

Pr 604

Set machine ID0001 - 9999

Pr 605 7 - 136

�7



7 - 1836.111.98.5.01.13


Database configuration (memory management). Pr 606 7 - 136

Number of PLU100 - 6000

01 7 - 137

Number of supplementary texts per PLU0 - 4

02 7 - 137

Number of BLD text fields per PLU 00 - 10 03 7 - 137

Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 0 - 3 04 7 - 137

Number of supplementary texts50- 1000

05 7 - 137

Number of items (ticket memory) 50- 1200 06 7 - 138

By Count, fixed weight and VAT 0001= By Count on; 0= off1= fixed weight on; 0= off1= Activate VAT; 0= deactivated1= Tare % permissible, 0= Tare % not permissible(country-dependent)

07 7 - 138

Decimal places0-3 = Number of decimal places4= Standard value (country-dependent)

08 7 - 138

Start Database configuration 88 7 - 139

Set scale for system (from program version 2.00)

Pr 607 7 - 140

Scale type 0= Standalone; 1= Slave; 9=Master 01 7 - 140

Multicast IP address 02 7 - 141

Multicast IP port number 03 7 - 141

UDP port number 04 7 - 141

�7



7 - 184 6.111.98.5.01.13


Control display lighting00= automatic display illumination off1-99 = automatic display illumination on

Pr 610 7 - 142

Scales switch-off time1-99 in minutes

Pr 615 7 - 143

WLAN settingsThe settings 02-07 only possible,if WLAN module is switched off (Pr 621/01

Pr 621

Module on/off0 = WLAN off1= WLAN on

01

Time slices for WLAN on/off in a defined period of timeX-YYYYYYYYX= 1-3 time slicesYYYYYYYY= Time on/off

02

Ping interval0000= Ping off0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec.Start of ping interval, when WLAN on (Pr 621/01)

03

IP address for WLAN 000000000000 04

Test telegram to host0= Send off0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec.

05

IP address of telegram recipient000000000000

06

Port number of telegram recipient0001-65536 (standard= 49152)

07

Switch on/off beeper 0001= Normal beeper on; 0= off1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off

Pr 622

�7



7 - 1856.111.98.5.01.13


Scale (display) sensitivity 0-50= Display sensitive..5= Display less sensitive against vibrations

Pr 625 7 - 147

Reconfigure keyboard Pr 630 7 - 148

Keyboard selection00= 84-keyboard standard01= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame02 = 84-keyboard with 30 front foil03= 84-keyboard, reprogrammed

Pr 631 7 - 149

Clearing RAM81 RAM is cleared

Pr 666 7 - 150

Input password for menu1XXXXX 6-digit numeric password000000 Password is deactivated

Pr 690

Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings Pr 695 7 - 151

Change main currency to second currency0= Main currency in old local currency1= Main currency in new local currency

01

Convert PLU price into Euro 02

�7



7 - 186 6.111.98.5.01.13

Service Menu Sub. see page

Test printing Pr 700 7 - 152

Print boot log information Pr 701 7 - 152

Print fonts Pr 702 7 - 153

Print menu settings Pr 703 7 - 153

Print weighing system information Pr 704 7 - 154

Printer settings Pr 710 7 - 155

Infeed for labels00 - 11 = minus feed12 Standard settings13-24 plus infeed

01

Move print format on the label00 - 11 = minus feed12 Standard settings13-24 plus infeed

02 7 - 155

Correct ticket feed00-19 minus feed20 Standard settings21-40 plus infeed

03 7 - 156

Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket00-99 (the higher the number, the less sensitive is detec‐tion)00= Paper end detection off40= Standard settings

04

Change printing intensity0= no reduction1= Reduce the printing intensity by 10%2= Reduce the printing intensity by 20%3= Reduce the printing intensity by 30%

05

Display ADC program version Pr 712 7 - 157

Detailed display Pr 714

Display ADC type Pr 715 7 - 157

�7



7 - 1876.111.98.5.01.13

Service Menu Sub. see page

Display program version Pr 716 7 - 158

Main program Version number 01

Boot loader Version number 02

Option resource Version number 03

Layout resource Version number 04

Menu resource Version number 05

Text resource Version number 06

Keyboard resource Version number 07

Font resource Version number 08

SAP number 09

Display battery voltage Pr 717 7 - 159

Display test Pr 718 7 - 160

Logbook monitoring Pr 730 7 - 160

Display logbook 01 7 - 161

Print out logbook 02 7 - 162

�7



7 - 188 6.111.98.5.01.13

�7


Operating instruction BC II Troubleshooting

8 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

8 TroubleshootingYou can generally eliminate the errors specified below yourself, using the describedremedy.

In the case of errors which you cannot eliminate yourself and which are not described inthis Operating Manual, please call your Bizerba customer service point.

Please provide your Bizerba customer service point with the following details:

- Device type (see type plate)

- Device no. (see type plate)

- Error description

This will facilitate preparations by customer service staff.

8.1 Fault description

Fault Cause Rectification

Display does not illumi‐nate.

No supply voltage. Check and insert power cable.

Check connection plug

Check connection cable

Press On-Off key

Weight value display notat zero or modified.

Load plate not correctly posi‐tioned or objects located onthe load plate.

Soiling on or beneath the loadplate.

Scale not leveled.

Clean load plate, position cor‐rectly and remove objects.

Level scale.

Switch scale off/on.

Printer will not print. Open print head. Connect print head correctly(see page 5 - 10).

Printer jammed. Drive motor for paper trans‐port overloaded or jammed.

Check paper track and re‐move any detached labels.

Clean printer (paper guide).

Poor receipt or labelprinting.

Unsuitable receipt or label pa‐per.

Clean thermal strip.

�8

Operating instruction BC IITroubleshooting

8 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

8.2 MessagesOperating errors or faults in the electronics are indicated by ”Cod” and an error code digit.

Display

kg T kg Price / kg Price

Cod 1 1 2

Messages Cause Rectification

Cod 112 Movement of the scale duringstart-up.

Do not move the scale!

Cod 110 Scale loaded during start-up. Unload scales!

Cod 110 Scale below zero during start-‐up.

Fit load plate!

Cod 110 Scale below zero after start-‐up.

Fit load plate and press <C>key!

Error 073 Scale sales overflow. Print and delete sales, seemenus Pr 310, Pr 311 and Pr320

PAPErEND End of paper

incorrect setting

insert new ticket paper or newlabel roll.

Check setting in Pr 505. 0= Receipt paper1=Label paper

Other error code digits --- Press <C> key or switch thescale off and on again with the<On-Of f> key.

�8

Operating instruction BC II Maintenance

9 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

9 Maintenance

9.1 CleaningThe cleaning instructions must be observed during installation, operation andmaintenance.

9.1.1 Cleaning device

_______________________________________________________________________

DANGER Water getting into device!

Danger of death from electric shock.

- Make sure that no water runs into the device when cleaning.

- Do not wash device off or spray-wash.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION Incorrect cleaning agents!

Damage of device surfaces.

- Do not use spirit, acetone or aggressive cleaning or scouring agents.

_______________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

Switch off device before cleaning and pull out power plug.

_______________________________________________________________________

Use warm water with dish-washing detergent (food safe) for cleaning. Use a soft,non-fraying cloth, moistened lightly.

�9

Operating instruction BC IIMaintenance

9 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

9.1.2 Cleaning the printer

Clean thermal barTicket printer, label printer or Linerless printer.The thermal printhead must be cleaned on a regular basis and as soon as you notice thatthe printing quality has decreased.

_______________________________________________________________________

ATTENTION Coated thermal bar!

The thermal bar is coated with a glass passivation layer and must notbe touched or cleaned with hard objects.

Use Bizerba cleaning products to clean the thermal bar.

_______________________________________________________________________

Open the side cover of the scale.

Open the printer cover by pulling itupwards.

Open the printhead.

Clean the thermal bar 1 with the Bizerbathermal printhead cleaning pen or dip acleaning pad in Bizerba cleaning solvent..

Afterwards, dry off with a dry cleaningbud.

Fig. 102: Thermal bar

�91


9 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

Clean label printerInspect label printer weekly for glue residue deposits on deflection pin, take-up arbor andpaper deflector and clean.

Clean the deflection pin and take-up pin.

Open the printer cover and printhead.

Remove the label roll.

Remove glue from parts 1 .

Fig. 103: Deflection pin, take-up pin

Clean paper deflector

Pull the paper deflector 2 out sideways.

Clean the paper deflector with the LRlabel remover, from Bizerba.The ”LR-label remover” may not beused to clean thermal bars.

Fig. 104: Paper deflector

Push the paper deflector 2 in sideways.

�9

1

1

2


9 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

9.1.3 Cleaning products for printer

Ordering informationThe cleaning products can be obtained from Bizerba Service or Bizerba technicalconsultants.

Cleaner for thermal bar

Cleaning pen 12ml

Order no.: 5077 7050000

or

Aerosol can, 200mlOrder no.: 9400 8900133

Thermal bar cleaning setconsisting of:5 cleaning buds made of wood with leathercoating1 pcs. IPA cleaning solvent 12 mlOrder no.: 9400 8919 000

Moisten the tip of the cleaning bud with afew drops of the cleaning solvent.

Clean the thermal bar immediately withcleaning bud.

�9


9 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

Cleaner for residues of glue from labels_______________________________________________________________________

ATTENTION Thermal bar coating and rubber rollers!

Damage to the coating

- Do not use label remover for cleaning thermal bar andrubber-covered roll!

_______________________________________________________________________

Label removerAerosol can, 200mlOrder no.: 9594 3000000

�9


9 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

9.2 Maintenance

The load plate must be removed every 4 weeks and loose dirt removed with a brush orvacuum cleaner.

Replace the load plate and check the zero point of the scale. Switch the scale off and on ifnecessary.

9.2.1 Testing the weight displayPlace reference weight of 2x3 kg on the scale and read off the display at 3 and 6kg.This test must be repeated at regular intervals.

9.2.2 Note on storing thermal paperStore unprinted thermal paper without direct light exposure to light (original packaging) inclosed box or similar, if possible. It keeps its printability for up to 5 years if stored at max.60 oC and at a max. of 65% relative air humidity.

Printed thermal paper is readable for up to 10 years if not exposed to direct sunlight and ifkept at temperatures up to a maximum of 30 o C and at a maximum of 65% relative airhumidity.

9.2.3 Ticket, label and Linerless rollersTo avoid faults in the device, only ticket and label rolls may be used that have beenchecked and approved by Bizerba.These ticket and label rollers are identified with acorresponding number.We are not liable for damage/faults that are produced from using ticket and label rolls thathave not been checked and approved by Bizerba.

Therefore, please order ticket, labels and Linerless rolls only at a Bizerba sales agent nearyou:

Bizerba GmbH & Co. KGPapier und EtikettenHarpener Hellweg 3144805 Bochum 1GermanyPhone: +49 234 / 9557-0FAX: +49 234 / 5070247

�9

Operating instruction BC II Technical data

10 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

10 Technical data

10.1 Dimensions

Scale BC II 800

L Length: 342 mm

W Width: 462 mm

H Overall height: 90 mm

H1 Complete height: 512 mm

Fig. 105: BC II 800

Scale BC II 100

L Length: 360 mm

W Width: 432 mm


Fig. 106: BC II 100

Scale BC II 200

L Length: 360 mm

W Width: 487 mm


H1 Complete height: 461 mm

Fig. 107: BC II 200

10W

H

L

H1

W

H

L

W

H

L

H1

Operating instruction BC IITechnical data

10 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

10.2 Power supply The electrical power supply must comply with the national requirements and tolerances.

Technical data for the mains power supply

Mains supplySingle-phase A.C. voltage, see data on type plate.

Permissible mains voltage tolerance (steady-state) normal:+6% to -10% of nominal value

Supply frequency:50/60 Hz

Permissible tolerance of mains frequency:+2% to -2%Permissible nonlinear distortion factor of supply voltage� 5%Protective conductor leakage current max.: 3.5 mA

10.3 Environmental conditionsThe following conditions must always be observed when using electronic retail scales,POS terminals, weighing and EDP systems, recording equipment and similar devices,equipment combinations and spare parts.

For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respectivemanufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.

Threshold values

Device family Protectiontype in

accordance with

IP

TemperatureoC Celsius

(degF Fahrenheit)Operation Storage

min. max. min. max.

Relative humidity�%

Operation Storagemin. max. min.�max.1

EDP systems: 20 +15(+60)

+30(+87)

-10(+14)

+43(+109) 8 80 20 80

Retail scales 20 -10(+14)

+40(+104)

-20(-4)

+60(+140) 90 90

External devices The threshold values of the respective manufacturer apply.

1 Bedewing of equipment is not permitted

10

Operating instruction BC II Subject index

11 - 16.111.98.5.01.13

Subject indexA

Addition of customer total, 7 - 85

ArticleAllocate supplementary text, 7 - 45Assign barcode, 7 - 42Assign product group, 7 - 41Clear, 7 - 51Data of origin, 7 - 44Define, 7 - 40Define article tare, 7 - 41Define unit price, 7 - 41Enter sell-by date, 7 - 42Overwrite unit price, 7 - 43Print list, 7 - 50Report, 7 - 75Text, 7 - 44Type, 7 - 43Weight class, 7 - 44

Assign VAT, to PLU, 7 - 35, 7 - 48

Assisted sale with labels, 6 - 29

Assisted sales with ticket, 6 - 24

Automatic zerosetting, 7 - 87

BBack-calculation, 7 - 47

Barcode, 7 - 15Assign Code 128, 7 - 28Barcode structure example for Code

128, 7 - 26Barcode structure example, EAN 13, 7

- 20Check and adopt code structure, 7 - 61Code 128, 7 - 23Code structure for all PLUs, 7 - 63Create barcode structure, 7 - 58Define structure, 7 - 58Delete code structure, 7 - 62EAN 13 structure example, 7 - 22for article, 7 - 42for non-PLU, 7 - 65for PLU, 7 - 42for total, 7 - 65Height on label, 7 - 119Height on ticket, 7 - 108Instore code, Examples, 7 - 22

Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 18, 7 - 21manage, 7 - 62Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 17Overview, 7 - 15Print barcode structure, 7 - 62Print code structures, 7 - 6, 7 - 62print on label, 7 - 119print on ticket, 7 - 108

Beeper, on/off, 7 - 146

BLDBLD label list, 7 - 6, 7 - 68BLD logo fields, 7 - 46Delete BLD labels, 7 - 69Delete BLD logos, 7 - 69Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 -

137Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 -

137Supplementary text for BLD text fields,

7 - 45

BLDLabel example, 7 - 115Select BLD labels, 7 - 118

BLD (Bizerba Label Designer), 7 - 6, 7- 45

By Count fixed weight, 7 - 47Create, 7 - 33Mandatory input of pieces, 6 - 42Overview, 7 - 33

By-CountBack-calculation, 7 - 47Compulsory entry, 7 - 89Create, 7 - 31Database configuration, 7 - 30Fixed weight mode, 7 - 47Mandatory entry, 7 - 47Overview, 7 - 30Piece goods, 7 - 30

CCancellation, 6 - 11

Cash registerCash register drawer, 6 - 44Connect cash drawer, 4 - 4Till function, 7 - 93

11

Operating instruction BC IISubject index

11 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.13

Change line, 7 - 10

Check digit, print on label, 7 - 123

Clean label printer, 9 - 3

Cleaning, 9 - 1

Cleaning printer, 9 - 2

Cleaning products, 9 - 4

ClearHeader and footer texts, 7 - 56RAM, 7 - 150Supplementary texts, 7 - 56Tare , 6 - 21

Clear memory, 7 - 150

Clearing RAM, 7 - 150

Code 128, 7 - 23Assign Code 128, 7 - 28Operating procedure for structure

creation, 7 - 25Structure example, 7 - 24, 7 - 26

Commissioning, 4 - 8

Conditions for the place ofinstallation, 4 - 1

Constant, 6 - 13, 7 - 91

Continuous operation, 7 - 36Multicast IP address, 7 - 141Multicast port number, 7 - 141Overview, 7 - 36Scale type, 7 - 140UDP port number, 7 - 141

Customer totalAddition, 7 - 87Addition , 7 - 85negative, 7 - 88Rounding, 7 - 105

DData field monitoring, 7 - 122

Data of origin, 7 - 44automatic traceability no., 7 - 29Manual input, 7 - 29sales report, 7 - 77

Database configuration, 7 - 132Memory management, 7 - 136Number of items (ticket memory), 7 -

138

Number of supplementary texts, 7 -137

Set DHCP, 7 - 133Set number of PLUs, 7 - 137Set TCP-IP, 7 - 132start, 7 - 139

Date , Representation, 7 - 83

Date/Timeset, 7 - 81Setting, 7 - 82

Decimal places, 7 - 138

Define supplementary texts, erstellen,7 - 52

Deleting, Supplementary texts, 7 - 56

Department number, 7 - 135

Designation label, 2 - 2

Device Configuration, 7 - 81

Device types, 2 - 1

Direct keys, 7 - 100

Display, 5 - 2control lighting, 7 - 142Icons, 5 - 2

Display ADC program version, 7 - 157

Display battery voltage, 7 - 159

Display program version, 7 - 158

Display test, 7 - 160

Display the load cell type, 7 - 157

EEAN 13, 7 - 18

Allocate EAN 13, 7 - 21Example of structure definition, 7 - 20Structure example, 7 - 19

End of label, 5 - 12

Environmental conditions, 10 - 2

Explanation of symbols, 1 - 2

FFixed weight

Back-calculation, 7 - 47Create, 7 - 32

11


11 - 36.111.98.5.01.13

Overview, 7 - 32

Fixed weight , Databaseconfiguration, 7 - 30

FontChange on label, 7 - 123change on ticket, 7 - 111

Font type, change, 7 - 9

Footer textClear, 7 - 56Define, 7 - 53print on ticket, 7 - 109Printing list, 7 - 55

Foreign currencyCalculation method, 7 - 130Currency exchange rate, 7 - 131Currency factor, 7 - 131Currency symbol, 7 - 130Decimal places, 7 - 130print on label, 7 - 124Print suppl. text on ticket, 7 - 110Rounding, 7 - 131Second currency display, 7 - 129Select function, 7 - 129Settings, 7 - 129

GGeneral operating mode settings, 7 -

87

Guidelines, 2 - 4

HHeader and footer text list, 7 - 4

Header textClear, 7 - 56Define, 7 - 53Deleting, 7 - 56print on label, 7 - 120print on ticket, 7 - 109Printing list, 7 - 55

IInitial display, 7 - 1

Initial setting, 7 - 3

InputSpecial characters, 7 - 11Text, 7 - 9, 7 - 10

Insert receipt paper, 5 - 11

Install label roll, 5 - 12

Installation, 4 - 1

Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 18

IP address, Display, 7 - 133, 7 - 135

KKey functions, 5 - 4

Keyboard, 5 - 3, 5 - 4Functions, 5 - 4Keyboard, 5 - 4Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3

Keyboard selection, 7 - 149

KeysFunction code table, 7 - 149Modify function, 7 - 148

Konformitätserklärung, 3, 5

LLabel

Barcode printout, 7 - 119Change font, 7 - 123Data field monitoring, 7 - 122Delete configuration, 7 - 128Label distance, 7 - 118Label height, 7 - 118Print article label, 7 - 92Print total label, 7 - 92Printing speed, 7 - 126Release print of:

Alternative text for sell-by date, 7 -120

Barcode, 7 - 119Check digit, 7 - 123Foreign currency, 7 - 124Header text, 7 - 120Logo, 7 - 120Machine ID, 7 - 123Operator No., 7 - 123Packaged-on and sell-by date, 7 -

118

11


11 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.13

Price range and texts, 7 - 123Tare, 7 - 119

Save configuration, 7 - 127Select configuration, 7 - 128Set barcode height, 7 - 119Set date field start, 7 - 121Set feed, 7 - 155Set text field start, 7 - 121

Label design, Overview, 7 - 114

Label printer, 5 - 12

Label type , 7 - 117

Labeling mode, 7 - 97

LabelsDelete BLD labels, 7 - 69Device Configuration, 7 - 116Move print format, 7 - 155Multi- printing, 6 - 7, 6 - 8Multiple printing, 7 - 98Price labeling mode, 6 - 6Price labeling mode , 6 - 5Print BLD label list, 7 - 68Quick-service mode, 6 - 4rotated layout, 7 - 124Self-service mode, 6 - 3

Leveling of scale, 4 - 2

ListsBarcode structures, 7 - 6, 7 - 62BLD label list, 7 - 6Communication settings, 7 - 135Delete header and footer text list, 7 -

56Delete supplementary text list, 7 - 56Header and footer text list, 7 - 4, 7 -

55Logo list, 7 - 7Menu settings, 7 - 153PLU (articles), 7 - 4PLU article list, 7 - 50PLU direct keys, 7 - 5, 7 - 103Supplementary text list, 7 - 5, 7 - 55Weighing system information, 7 - 154

Logbook monitoring, 7 - 160

LogoBLD, 7 - 46Delete, 7 - 68Print list, 7 - 68

MMachine ID, print on label, 7 - 123

Main operating mode, 7 - 3, 7 - 84select, 7 - 85

Mains supply, 3 - 2, 4 - 3

Maintenance, 9 - 1, 9 - 6

Manual input, 6 - 9

Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 17

Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3

Memory management, 7 - 136

Menu call-up, 7 - 2

Menu password, 7 - 1, 7 - 150

Minus amount, 6 - 10

Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2, 7 - 91

MultiplicationMinus amount, 6 - 10PLU price per piece, 6 - 16Price per piece manual input, 6 - 9

NNegative customer total, 7 - 88

NetworkDisplay IP address, 7 - 135Settings, 7 - 132

Non-PLU, Settings, 7 - 64

Numeric code , 7 - 59

OOperating conditions, 2 - 5

Operating optionsLabels multi-printing/fixed weight, 6 - 8Multi- printing of labels, 6 - 7Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2Overview, 6 - 2Price labeling mode, 6 - 5, 6 - 6Quick-service mode, 6 - 4Self-service mode, 6 - 3

Operational safety, 3 - 2

11


11 - 56.111.98.5.01.13

Operator, Report, 7 - 77

Operator items display , 7 - 93

Operator report, 7 - 77

Operator tare, 6 - 22call up value saved, 6 - 23save value entered, 6 - 22save weighed value, 6 - 22

Overview of list, 7 - 4

Overwrite unit price, 6 - 16

PPackaged-on date

Alternative text, 7 - 126print on label, 7 - 118

PaperLabel printer, 5 - 13Receipt printer, 5 - 11

Paper end detection, 7 - 156

Paper type, 7 - 84

Password, 7 - 1, 7 - 150

Payment in/out, 6 - 44, 7 - 94Release printout on ticket, 7 - 112

Place of installation, 4 - 1

PLU, 5 - 5-Overwrite unit price, 6 - 16Allocate supplementary text, 7 - 45Article text, 7 - 44Assign barcode, 7 - 42Assign product group, 7 - 41call, 6 - 14Clear, 7 - 51Define, 7 - 40Define PLU tare, 7 - 41Direct key allocation, 7 - 100Enter sell-by date, 7 - 42Input with 10-key keypad, 6 - 15Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 -

137Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 -

137Number of supplementary texts per

PLU, 7 - 137Overwrite unit price, 7 - 43Print article label, 7 - 92Print direct keys list, 7 - 5

Print list, 7 - 50registration, 6 - 16Report, 7 - 75Round article total, 7 - 105Set number, 7 - 137Tare , 6 - 21Weight class, 7 - 44

PLU , Define unit price, 7 - 41

PLU list, 7 - 4

PLU maintenance, 7 - 39Define PLU, 7 - 40

Power supply, 10 - 2

Price calculation, 7 - 104

Price labeling mode, 6 - 5, 6 - 6, 7 -97

Price overwrite, 6 - 16

Price overwriting, 7 - 43

Price per piece manual input, 6 - 9

Print boot log information, 7 - 152

Print communication settings, 7 - 135

Print direct keys list, 7 - 5

Print fonts, 7 - 153

Print logbook, 7 - 162

Print menu settings, 7 - 153Weighing system information, 7 - 154

Print PLUDirect key mode, 7 - 100Enter number of digits, 7 - 100input mode, 7 - 99Number of digits for input, 7 - 100Print direct keys, 7 - 103Range limit, 7 - 101

Print PLU , Device Configuration, 7 -100

Print supplement. text list, 7 - 5

Print weighing system information, 7- 154

Printer, 5 - 8Label printer, 5 - 12Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800 ,

5 - 9Printer lid BC II 100/200 , 5 - 8Receipt printer, 5 - 11

11


11 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.13

Side cover BC II 100/ 200, 5 - 8test, 7 - 152Thermal print head, 5 - 10

Printer settings, 7 - 155Change printing intensity , 7 - 156

Printing head, open/close, 5 - 10

Printing speed, 7 - 126

Product group, for non-PLU, 7 - 66

Product group report, 7 - 76

Product groups, for PLU, 7 - 41

Product with data of origin, 6 - 45

Programming overview, 7 - 163

QQuick- service mode, 7 - 96

Quick-service mode, 6 - 4

RRange limit, 7 - 101

Receipt printer, 5 - 11

Receipt printer paper end, 5 - 11

Rechargeable battery, 4 - 6Icons, 4 - 7

Reports, 7 - 72Customer title for reports, 7 - 73on label, 7 - 79on ticket, 7 - 74Operator, 7 - 77PLU articles, 7 - 75PLU products, 7 - 75Product groups, 7 - 76Scales, 7 - 74Traceability data sales, 7 - 77, 7 - 78VAT report, 7 - 79

Reverification, 2 - 3

Rounding, 7 - 104By-Count, 7 - 106Foreign currency, 7 - 131Supplementary text, 7 - 110

SSafety instructions, 3 - 1

SalesClear, 7 - 80Display, 7 - 80Print on label, 7 - 79Sales calculation, 7 - 89

Sales calculation, Release addition, 7- 89

ScalePayment in/out, 6 - 44Sensitivity, 7 - 147Turn-of f time, 7 - 143with cash drawer, 6 - 44

Scale number, 7 - 135

Scale report, 7 - 74

Scale switch-off time, 7 - 143

Scales network, Continuousoperation, 7 - 36

Scroll function, 6 - 12

Scrolling messagesactivate, 7 - 90activating, 7 - 14, 7 - 90Define text, 7 - 14, 7 - 54Delete text, 7 - 57print, 7 - 5select, 7 - 90Select display location, 7 - 90Settings, 7 - 90test, 7 - 91

Second currency, 7 - 151Change main currency, 7 - 151Convert PLU price, 7 - 151

Select layoutLabel layout, 7 - 85, 7 - 86Receipt layout, 7 - 85Ticket layout, 7 - 86

Self-service mode, 6 - 3

Sell-by dateAlternative text on label, 7 - 120Print on label, 7 - 118

11


11 - 76.111.98.5.01.13

Print texts, 7 - 123

Sensitivity, of the scale, 7 - 147

Service menu, 7 - 152

Set width of paper , 5 - 13

Setting IP address, einstellen, 7 - 133

Setting machine ID, einstellen, 7 - 136

SettingsDate, 7 - 82Date representation, 7 - 83Department number, 7 - 135different operating modes, 7 - 85Display lighting, 7 - 142DNS1, DNS2, 7 - 134Euro, 7 - 151for different operating modes, 7 - 87Foreign currency, 7 - 129Gateway, 7 - 133Host name, 7 - 134IP address, 7 - 133Machine ID, 7 - 136Main operating mode, 7 - 84Multiple-operator mode, 7 - 91Network, 7 - 132Non-PLU, 7 - 64Price calculation, 7 - 104Price labeling mode, 7 - 97Print menu settings, 7 - 153Printer, 7 - 155Quick service mode, 7 - 96Quick-service mode, 7 - 96Scale number, 7 - 135Scrolling messages, 7 - 90Sensitivity, 7 - 147Subnet mask, 7 - 133Switching operating mode, 7 - 86TCP-IP, 7 - 132Time, 7 - 82Year with 2, 4 digits, 7 - 82

Side cover , 5 - 8

Special characters, 7 - 11

Standards, 2 - 4

Subtotal, 6 - 13

Supplementary textfor BLD text fields, 7 - 45for PLU, 7 - 45

Supplementary textsClear, 7 - 56

Printing, 7 - 55

Supply voltage , 3 - 2, 4 - 3

Switch off, 6 - 1

Switch on, 6 - 1

Switching operation mode, 7 - 3, 7 -86select, 7 - 86

SystemContinuous operation, 7 - 36Identification on system, 7 - 37Installation, 4 - 5Multicast IP address, 7 - 141Multicast port number, 7 - 141Scale type, 7 - 140System conditions, 7 - 37System set-up, 7 - 37Take device out of the system, 7 - 38UDP port number, 7 - 141

TTalon, 6 - 25, 7 - 94

TareFixed value memory, 7 - 104print on label, 7 - 119print on ticket, 7 - 109

TareBatch tare, 6 - 19clear, 6 - 21Manual tare, 6 - 20Operator tare, 6 - 22, 6 - 23PLU tare, 7 - 41Tare %, 7 - 49unknown tare, 6 - 18

Tare functions, 6 - 18PLU tare, 6 - 21Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4, 6 - 21

Test printing, 7 - 152

TextAlternative text for packaged-on date,

7 - 126Alternative text for use-by date, 7 -

126Define header and footer text, 7 - 53Deleting, 7 - 56Enter PLU text, 7 - 44Function keys, 7 - 13

11


11 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.13

Input, 7 - 9print

Header and footer text, 7 - 4, 7 - 55Supplementary texts, 7 - 5

Printing out overview, 7 - 55Scrolling messages, 7 - 54Suppl. article text, 7 - 45Supplementary text, 7 - 52

Thermal bar, Cleaning, 9 - 2

Thermal paper storage, 9 - 6

Thermal strip, close, 5 - 10

TicketAssisted sales, 6 - 24Change font, 7 - 111Correct feed, 7 - 156Device Configuration, 7 - 108Number of article text lines, 7 - 111Open ticket again, 6 - 26, 6 - 27, 7 -

94Open tickets, 7 - 88Print cancellation, 7 - 95Print foreign currency, 7 - 112print upon request, 6 - 25Printing if requested, 7 - 95Printing VAT included, 7 - 95Release print of:

Amount paid in/out, 7 - 112Barcode, 7 - 108footer text, 7 - 109Foreign currency suppl. text, 7 - 110Header text, 7 - 109Rounding suppl. text, 7 - 110Supplementary product text, 7 - 112Tare, 7 - 109

Repeat ticket, 6 - 26Set barcode height, 7 - 108Ticket counter, 7 - 111Ticket repetition, 7 - 94

Ticket design, Overview, 7 - 107

Time, Setting, 7 - 82

Total, 6 - 13Rounding of article total, 7 - 105Rounding of customer total, 7 - 105

Total , Total label, 7 - 85

Total sales report, 7 - 79Clear, 7 - 80Display, 7 - 80

Traceability data, 6 - 45

Traceability marker, 7 - 29, 7 - 88Define traceability number, 7 - 88Manual input, 7 - 29PLU data of origin, 7 - 44

UUnit price, programming, 7 - 41

Unit price input, 6 - 9via 10-key keypad, 6 - 9

Use-by date, 7 - 42Alternative text, 7 - 126for non-PLU, 7 - 64

VVAT

can be overwritten, 7 - 48Define for all articles, 7 - 71Define tax rate, 7 - 70for non-PLU, 7 - 67for non-PLU minus, 7 - 67for non-PLU weighed, 7 - 67incl. or exclusive, 7 - 70List, 7 - 8Maintain, 7 - 69manage, 7 - 71Overview, 7 - 34Printing list, 7 - 71Text , 7 - 70

VendorsKeys, 7 - 99Number, 7 - 123

Verbund, Installation, 4 - 5

Verification information, 2 - 3

WWaagenverbund, Installation, 4 - 5

Weight class, 7 - 44

Weight input, Manual, 6 - 17

WLANFunctional diagnosis, 7 - 146on/off, 7 - 143

11


11 - 96.111.98.5.01.13

Settings, 7 - 144, 7 - 145Switch on, 7 - 144

YYear , 2 or 4-digit, 7 - 82

ZZerosetting, 6 - 1, 7 - 87

11


11 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.13

11

Operating instruction BC II Appendix

6.111.98.5.01.13

Appendix

Declaration of Conformity for BC ll

Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN


Operating instruction BC IIAppendix

6.111.98.5.01.13

Date: June 27th, 2011

Signature of manufacturer: ppa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Title: Matthias HarschChief Executive Officer-Sales (CEO-S)Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG

Hauptverwaltung BalingenPostfach 10 01 64, 72301 BalingenWilhelm-Kraut-Straße 6572336 Balingen, Germany

6.111.98.5.01.13

Declaration of type conformityWe declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument describedbelow

Definition: retail scale

Type: BC II . . . (BC II 100, 200, 800)

No. of EC type approval certificate: D07-09-014

No. of notified body for EC type approvalcertificate: 0102 (PTB)

complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the currentrequirements of the following EC directives:

Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments 2009/23/EG (90/384/EWG)

EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC

Directive on electrical equipment designed for usewithin certain voltage limits

2006/95/EC

Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology: DIN EN 45501 (OIML R76-Ed. 2006)

EMC: DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 61000-6-3/2007-09DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Safety: DIN EN 60950-1/

This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automaticweighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of typeconformity of a notified body.This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba.

The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerbaorder documents). Any modification made to the above device type without theprior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.

6.111.98.5.01.13

Date: June 27th, 2011

Signature of manufacturer: ppa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Title: Matthias HarschChief Executive Officer-Sales (CEO-S)Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG

Hauptverwaltung BalingenPostfach 10 01 64, 72301 BalingenWilhelm-Kraut-Straße 6572336 Balingen, Germany

6.111.98.5.01.13

Declaration of type conformityWe declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument describedbelow

Definition: retail scale

Type: BC II . . . with WLAN(BC II 100, 200, 800)

No. of EC type approval certificate: D07-09-014

No. of notified body for EC type approvalcertificate: 0102 (PTB)

complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the currentrequirements of the following EC directives:

Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments 2009/23/EG

EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC

Directive on electrical equipment designed for usewithin certain voltage limits

2006/95/EC

Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology: DIN EN 45501 (OIML R76-Ed. 2006)

EMC: DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 61000-6-3/2007-09DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06

Safety: DIN EN 60950-1

WLAN: See data in declaration of conformity of manufacturer.

This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automaticweighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of typeconformity of a notified body.This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba.

The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerbaorder documents). Any modification made to the above device type without theprior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.

6.111.98.5.01.13


1 / 5

6.111.98.5.01.13


2 / 5

6.111.98.5.01.13


3 / 5

6.111.98.5.01.13


4 / 5

6.111.98.5.01.13


5 / 5

Documents

Manual Operare Bizerba En